Cinematic Adventures: The Greatest Showmanby extremeenigma02ChaptersMusical MiseryP.T. BarnumA Genius IdeaShow BusinessThis is MeA Change in BehaviorFrom Now OnThe Greatest ShowA Bad DayMusical MiseryA cool Autumn breeze blew through the night in the magical capital city of Equestria, Canterlot. The streets were full of ponies, of all social classes, all dressed in their fanciest evening wear. They all engaged in small banter as they made their way down the road, all heading for one particular place in mind: Phantasma. Ever since the adventures of the ‘Phantom of the Opera’, the former opera ghost Erik had constructed a colossal opera house right in the heart of Canterlot. This was his sanctuary where he could showcase his musical mastery to the entire world. He had plans to expand his business even further by constructing a theme park, but that was a venture for another day. For tonight, every pony from far and wide came to see the amazing musical stylings of one of the greatest singers in all Equestria: Countess Coloratura… Twilight Sparkle and the rest of the Mane Six all ventured into the grand hall of the Phantasma Opera House, looking around as they admired the grand architecture of the building. When Erik had constructed the opera house, he intended for it to share the many qualities of the Opera Populaire. There were golden statues everywhere, every seat was made of the finest material money could buy, all the walls were decorated in lavish artwork and beautiful trimmings. Needless to say, it was truly a sight to behold for one and all. “WOW-WEE!” Pinkie exclaimed excitedly. “Took the words right outta mah mouth there Pinkie,” Applejack nodded in awe. “Is this really the first time we’ve ever actually been in this opera house?” Fluttershy asked. “It seems that way Flutters,” Rainbow nodded. “Personally, give me a good buck ball game any day of the week.” “Come now hon, we’re here to support Rara’s performance,” Applejack reminded her marefriend. Rainbow rolled her eyes and nodded her head. “Alright,” She groaned. “But you owe me later tonight, no matter how tired we get.” Before their interaction could possibly go any further, the owner of the opera house himself emerged from his office and headed in their direction. Rarity instantly ran to her husband, embracing him in a loving hug. “Ah, my most cherished beauty!” Erik smiled happily. “I am so glad you and the others could attend tonight’s performance.” “As am I my love,” Rarity said, kissing his cheek. “And how’s our ‘little one’ doing?” Erik asked, placing a hoof on her stomach. “Quite well,” Rarity smiled. After their last adventure, in which his wife nearly died, Erik decided to do something special for Rarity and they took a second honeymoon to a lovely tropical island. It was a fantastic two weeks, just the two of them spending time together. About a month of two prior to their return, Rarity begun to act strangely, feeling sudden cravings and getting emotional out of the blue. They went to the doctor to confirm their suspicions and sure enough they were informed they were expecting. Being that Rarity was only three moths along, she wasn’t really ‘showing’ all that much. But soon enough, they could not wait to meet their little darling. “Come everyone, I have our box ready for us,” Erik told everybody. “Box Five?” Rarity asked. “You know me so well…” Every pony followed Erik upstairs to their private box, leading them down to none other than Box Five. Every pony took their seats and waited for the show to begin. Soon enough, the lights in the opera house dimmed and everyone applauded as the curtains were pulled aside. The only one on stage was Countess Coloratura, dressed in a very nice dress. The famous singer stepped out before the audience, giving a bow before she stood back and took a deep breath. Music started to play softly, then she began to sing in that angelic voice only she was capable of providing. When the song finished, the audience stood, clapping and cheering loudly for the singer. Rara had a few tears falling down her face from all the passion she put into her performance, as she bowed for her audience. Many of them even threw flowers onto the stage to showcase their appreciation. The curtain closed as Rara started working her way off the stage. <> Later… After the show was over, Rara was in her dressing room backstage when a sudden knock at the door drew her attention away from the mirror. “Come in!” She called. The door opened as Applejack was the first to enter, followed by the rest of the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik. Seeing her longtime friend since they were campers always made Rara smile and feel at home… in her heart. She stood up from her seat as Applejack walked up and they both embraced. “Y’all were amazing tonight Rara, just as ya always are,” Applejack complimented. “Thank you A.J.,” Rara replied, smiling. “I certainly hope so anyway. I’m always trying to put forth everything I have for my fans.” “Well you certainly succeeded darling,” Rarity spoke up. “You were absolutely mesmerizing to say the least.” “Oh yes, you really were amazing tonight,” Fluttershy agreed. “Amazing?” Pinkie replied. “She was more than amazing. She was more like a combination between wonderful and stupendous. So that means… she was stupenderful!” “Eh… it was alright,” Rainbow shrugged. Applejack gave her marefreind a particularly hard swat on her flank with her tail. The rainbow-haired tomboy leapt with a yelp. “Ow!” She yelled. “What was that for?” “Be nice!” Applejack snipped back. “Ah’m sorry Rara, you’ll have tah forgive mah marefriend. She ain’t too much in the courtesy department.” “It’s alright,” Rara assured her. “I’m just really glad you all came tonight.” “Their words speak true my star,” Erik praised. “You gave an immaculate performance tonight, as you have all other nights since you’ve worked for me.” “I really do appreciate the opportunity you’ve given me sir,” Rara replied. The sound of a great big ‘YAWN!’ caused everyone to turn toward the teenage Spike, who was having a tough time keeping his eyes open… much less standing on his own two feet. “Not to sound rude or nothing, but can we ‘please’ head back home and go to bed?” He asked tiredly. “Oh Spike…” Twilight giggled. “You may be grown, but you’re still that tired baby dragon at heart.” “Hardy-har…” Everyone else laughed as well, but ultimately agreed it ‘was’ getting rather late. Soon as every pony gave their final goodbyes to Rara, congratulating her for a wonderful show, they made their leave for the train station for a well-deserved rest at home. <> The next day… The bright rays of the sun dawned over Ponyville’s blue sky. The birds were all chirping a melody so sweet, as the denizens of the quiet little town went about their daily business. Applejack strolled through tow pulling a cart full of apples behind her, all of which she was fixing to sell. Derick Collins was also walking alongside her, pulling yet another cart along with Big Mac. “Think we have enough to sell or what?” Derick asked sarcastically. “Eeyup!” Big Mac nodded. “We sure do sugar cube,” Applejack responded. “Sellin’ these here apples should help last us a while.” “Not to mention the apple fritters, apple pies, apple dumplings…” Derick listed. “You ponies sure love your apples.” “Ah hush on up now,” Applejack scolded. “Help me set up this cart please.” About a few minutes later, the two ponies had the cart set up and ready for business. “Looks like that’s the end of it,” Derick sighed in relief. “I really should get going. I promised Carried we’d take a night walk down by the pond.” “Oh alright,” Applejack smiled. “Say… how is Carrie by the way?” “Well, she’s been better,” Derick answered. “Poor girl hardly gets out of the house often, usually she just sleeps like she hasn’t slept in years. It’s wonderful being with her, all the same. We’d take our walks everyday and I try to spark up a conversation. But usually it’s just me jabbering like a monkey in a tree… least she listens.” “She’s just been through so much, a girl like her just needs time,” Applejack assured. “As long as she appreciates your company, that’s all that matters.” “Yeah… when you’re right, you’re right.” “Well, go on now. You two love birds have yerselves a good ole time now, ya hear?” “Will do!” Derick nodded. “Later A.J.” Derick soon walked off through town and eventually disappeared around the corner. Applejack smiled after him, remembering the events of their last adventure and everything that young man did to save Carrie White. A man so willing to give up everything he was raised to believe in and all for the girl he loved. It made Applejack and every pony else have real admiration for him. The sound of approaching hooves behind her made her turn around, expecting her first customer of the day. “Sorry y’all, but we ain’t open just…” She instantly stopped herself when she saw it was Rara behind her. The poor singer had huge crocodile tears running down her face and seemed like she was sad beyond belief. “Rara, what happened?” She asked concerned. “Are ya alright?” Rara gave no response but merely just held out a newspaper for Applejack, as she kept sobbing. Applejack grabbed the paper from her friend and began to read its contents. “’Famous singer on her way out the door’?!” She read in shock. “’Countess Coloratura gave a meager, weak performance last night in Canterlot, leaving audiences wondering if her career has finally come to its end’.” Applejack couldn’t help but grow angrier and angrier with every word she read in the newspaper. How dare some kooky critic bash her friend in such a manner? Rara’s performance last night was spectacular beyond words and yet someone had the nerve to slander her? She reeled in her anger as best she could because she knew that her friend needed her right now and she tried to put on a good face. “Ah’m sorry Rara,” She apologized. “Ah can’t imagine how ya must be feelin’ right now.” “Maybe they’re right,” Rara sobbed. “Maybe I have come to the end of my career. Aside from Erik, no pony has booked me to perform in over a year. I guess I’m just no good anymore.” Applejack couldn’t bear it anymore, as she wrapped a hoof around her foal-hood friend trying to calm her down. “Don’t y’all go sayin’ that now,” She said. “Yer an amazin’ singer, one ah the best Equestria has ever had. Ah know fer sure that ah ain’t the only one that thinks so.” “But the reviews…” “Them reviews ain’t nothin’ but a bunch ah phony nonsense,” Applejack assured. “Besides, it’s just ‘one’ critic.” “Oh yeah?” Rara pulled off her saddlebag she strapped on her back and dumped out its contents, of which revealed to be more newspapers from Manehatten, Baltimare, Las Pegasus, and Fillydelphia. Each one of them held the same sort of review from other critics. “Okay, maybe it ‘ain’t’ just one,” Applejack sighed. “But these reviews are a matter of opinion, not facts. They don’t mean nothin’.” “Maybe not for ‘you’ A.J., but it does to me!” Rara responded. “Music is the only thing I’ve ever wanted to do with my life. Ever since I was a filly, I’ve worked hard to become a professional singer and now that it’s all about to come crashing down… I’m so scared! I don’t know what to do… I don’t know what to do!” Applejack couldn’t stand to see her friend so upset. It was true Rara worked hard to get to where she is now. If these sort of things kept happening, sooner or later her career ‘could’ come to an end. Applejack could not… no, wouldnot let that happen to her friend. Thinking on a whim, she knew exactly what needed to be done. “Come with me Rara,” She said. “Ah know ‘exactly’ what we need tah do. Big Mac, hold the fort while we’re gone ya hear?” “Eeyup!” Mac responded simply. Applejack led her friend down the streets of Ponyville to the direction of ‘one’ place that could offer just the solution: Discord’s theatre… <> Later… Applejack assembled the entire Mane Six, including Spike, Rara, and Erik. Once together, they gathered at Discord’s theatre, studying the many different newspapers Rara collected. To say the least, none of them were very happy about it at all. “It’s blasphemy, I tell you!” Erik said angrily. “My star’s a sensational delight upon the stage. How dare these vile cretins?! Having the gall to slander her good name.” “They’re lucky they live pretty far away, or I’d give each of them a piece of my mind!” Rainbow growled. “And a glass of ‘punch’ to wash it all down.” “Okay, okay! We all agree this is a problem,” Twilight agreed. “The question then becomes ‘what’ we should do about it.” “Ain’t it obvious sugar cube?” Applejack asked. She tiled her head a few times, gesturing toward the giant screen the television was hooked up to. To say Twilight was slightly apprehensive about it was an understatement. “I don’t know Applejack,” She answered uncertainly. “Every time we go through the television, we always bring back something bad from wherever we end up.” “Ah come on, they weren’t all ‘that’ bad!” Pinkie spoke up. “Carrie’s been fitting in with us and Rarity’s married to a misunderstood scary musical man… no offense, Erik.” “None taken…” Erik spoke dryly. “My point is…” Twilight continued. “I think we should speak to Princess Celestia about this; perhaps there’s a something she might be able to do about this slander.” “Ah’m tellin’ ya sugar cube if we can just find a place Rara can perform and shine like the star she truly is maybe it can help silence those doubters.” “Maybe Twilight’s right, A.J.,” Rara spoke up. “I’ve seen all the adventures you guys been on and they seem pretty dangerous. I think it’s just time to admit that I’ve come to the end of my rope and at least retire in peace. I have an uncle who runs a shoe factory…” “Nuh-uh! Ah ain’t lettin’ ya do that Rara,” Applejack spoke determined. “Ya said so yerself, singin’ is all ya ever wanted tah do with yer life. Ya give it up now, yer just provin’ them critics right about ya.” Rara sighed to herself, but she knew deep in her heart Applejack was absolutely right. This had been her dream since she was a foal, she couldn’t just throw it all away just because some ponies told her to. Anything in life that means anything must be worth fighting for. “You know I swear this whole scenario feels ‘familiar’ for some reason…” Pinkie pondered, scratching her head. “Now where have I heard this plot before?” “If we’re going to help Rara, how would we do it?” Fluttershy asked. Twilight thought over the notion for a moment before an imaginary lightbulb went off in her head. Approaching the television, she reached under the stand it sat upon and proceeded to pull out some weird device connected to the television. Soon she reapproached the group waiting anxiously. “Celestia, Storm, and I have been working on this the past couple months,” Twilight informed. “I think it might be time to give it a test.” “Now?” Rainbow asked, raising a brow. “What is it, Twi?” Spike asked, observing the device. “Looks like some weird robotic headgear.” “Ooh, I love robots!” Pinkie squealed gleefully. “Especially the ones from that movie we’ll be doing in the future… oh, wait a minute! Wasn’t supposed to give that away… pretend you didn’t hear that. Heh-heh… my bad.” Everyone looked at Pinkie before shaking their heads and ignoring her strange comments. “Well basically, we assembled this device to hook up to a pony’s subconscious and delve deep into the recesses of their minds to where their cognitive…” “UGH! Can we please skip the egghead talk?” Rainbow asked irritated. “And maybe explain it like we’re two years old?!” Twilight glared at her for a moment before releasing a deep sigh. “Basically… you put it on your head, think of what you want most, and it’ll open the portal,” Twilight spoke deadpanned. “Thank you!” Rainbow smirked. Twilight approached Rara and though she spoke no words, Rara instantly knew what to do. She bowed her head, allowing Twilight to hook up the device around her head. “Now I want you to relax and think of what you want most in this world,” Twilight instructed. Releasing a deep exhale and shutting her eyes, Rara cleared her mind and focused on the one thing she wanted more than anything. A strange humming sound emanated from the device, as an electrical surge raced through the cord attached to it and traversed along the television. Every pony watched in shock as the portal opened and Rara opened her eyes as Twilight removed the device from her head. The Mane Six, Spike, and Rara gathered around the portal and made to step inside. “Wait!” Everyone froze and turned toward Erik, who approached their side. “If you’re venturing off on this quest, I’m coming along as well,” He said. “Are you quite certain of that darling?” Rarity asked. “It could very well be dangerous.” “All the more reason to accompany you,” Erik responded. “I refuse to let you venture off on your own where anything could happen to you… or our child. I swore to protect and love you for the rest of my days, and I’m going along with you one way or the other.” Rarity smiled at her husband, sincerely touched over how he truly cared so much for her and their child that he would go along with them just to keep them safe. Rarity leaned forward and kissed her husband earnestly before they both looked toward the portal. Every pony took a deep breath before taking a step forward and walking through the portal together. They had no idea what this adventure would entail, but they were determined to get through it together just as they always have. P.T. BarnumAuthor's Note If you all are looking for the full lyrics to the songs in this story, you may find them in the story on Wattpad or wait for Phantom Dragons commentaries that will also have them in them. Meanwhile, I hope that you all enjoy this new chapter. P.T. Barnum A strong wind blew through the air as the crystal portal opened up and the Mane Six, along with Spike, Rara, and Erik stepped through to the other side. The moment they all stepped out, the portal closed up behind them leaving them all in this new world that they had stepped into. Looking about their new surroundings, they all noticed they seemed to be standing inside of a small apartment from the looks of it. It was a relatively small and dark living space with a few candles lit around the entire place. There was a leak in the roof with droplets of water falling down into a cast iron pot on the floor. To say the least, it seemed like a crummy place to call home. “What a dump!” Rainbow remarked. “Is this what ya were picturin’ in yer head?” Applejack asked her friend. “Not exactly,” Rara responded. “I was picturing a place where I would be able to sing and shine like I once did.” “And this is where it sent us?” Spike asked, disappointed. “A rundown old apartment?” “I don’t think it’s all bad,” Pinkie smiled. “Just needs a bit of sprucing up here and there. You know maybe some new wallpaper and some carpets. You know I was thinking maybe something more modern contempt, something really sheik and fresh you know?” Every pony and Spike all looked at Pinkie with quirked eyebrows as the pink party pony just shrugged and giggled happily to herself. “Do I really sound like that when I speak?” Rarity asked. “I swear the more Pinkie speaks, the less and less sense comes out,” Erik commented. He looked down toward his wife, who stared wide-eyed at him almost in shock. He was about to question ‘why’ she was staring in such a manner until he realized how diminutive she was next to him. Looking down at himself, he was surprised to discover he no longer had hooves, but hands. He had once again assumed human form much to everyone’s amazement. However, it clearly was not the same form he had when he departed from France. “Oh my goodness!” Fluttershy gasped. “You said it Flutters,” Rainbow agreed. “Erik darling, you look… different,” Rarity spoke, in shock. “Honestly I prefer Ramin Karimloo’s version of him better,” Pinkie added. “No offense to Gerald Butler fans.” Erik ran a hand over his face where his mask resided as it always did. A horrid thought came to him. If he had retaken a human form, did that meant he was disfigured yet again? He noticed a small hand mirror on a table close by and quickly scrambled over to pick it up. Holding it up to look upon his face, he slowly and shakily reached up to remove his mask, fearing what horrors lied beneath. Removing his mask from his face, he shut his eyes tightly before slowly opening them again. To his great relief there was no deformity at all, all that stared back at him was a handsome face. “Thank God I heaven,” He sighed in relief. Erik rejoined his wife, along with her friends, as they tried to make heads or tails of this. “Why has Erik taken a human form and not us?” Rarity wondered. “I think it has something to do with the fact he was human originally,” Twilight theorized. “Seeing as how we’re probably in another human world, it would only make sense Erik would retake his original form.” “That certainly sparks a ton of questions from our previous adventures,” Pinkie replied. While in discussion, Spike approached the lone window in the room they were currently occupying, looking toward the streets below. Hundreds of people walked the streets, all of them dressed in old-fashioned clothing. A number of carriages were also being pulled along the streets by horses. It was safe to say they were not in a modern day human world. The question then became where exactly they were. The sudden sound of a door swinging open made every freeze in place and turn toward a man, a woman, and two small children entering the apartment. The man himself was as tall as Erik, with dark brown hair and matching sideburns. The woman beside him was rather beautiful with blonde hair that went down her shoulders. The two little girls with them didn’t even seem like they were past the age of ten, one of them was the spitting image of their father with brown hair and the other resembled their mother with blonde hair. The family all froze in place when they noticed the colorful ponies, the teenage dragon, and the former opera ghost standing in the midst of their home. “What are you all doing in my house?” The man asked. “Who are you?” The woman asked fearfully. “If you’ve come to rob us, we have nothing to give you.” “No, no, no, it’s not what you think!” Twilight assured quickly. “We aren’t here to rob or hurt you.” The two parents gasped upon hearing the purple alicorn speak, except the two young girls who both stared at the group in wonder. “Stay back or I will get the police!” The man warned them. “Please sir, just give us the opportunity to explain.” “… And that pretty much sums it up.” After the initial shock of multi-colored talking ponies in their home, the family originally wanted to run and find the police to deal with this matter. However, the father found himself rather intrigued with them as did the two girls and even eventually the mother. They allowed them to explain their story to them for the past few hours, all listening intently, and with amazed looks upon their faces any doubt they had about these new visitors had vanished. “That’s certainly quite the story,” The man spoke, amazed. “A magical device that takes you to many different worlds. Almost seems impossible to believe.” “Buddy, you’re speaking with talking ponies, Pegasi, unicorns, and even a dragon,” Rainbow commented. “Impossible is pretty hard to believe at this point.” The father himself chuckled at her statement as he nodded his head in affirmatio. “It would certainly seem that way,” He agreed. “Where are my manners? I haven’t bothered to introduce myself or my family. My name’s Phineas Taylor Barnum, and this is my wife Charity and our two daughters Caroline and Helen.” “Pleasure to make your acquaintance,” Charity greeted kindly. “It’s really nice to meet you all as well,” Twilight smiled. “My name is Twilight Sparkle. These are my friends Rainbow Dash, Applejack, Fluttershy, Pinkie Pie, Spike, Rara, and Erik.” All the ponies and Spike smiled and waved toward Barnum and his family, while Erik gave a courteous bow. “Wow, you all sound really amazing,” Caroline smiled with glee. “Did you really do all those things you talked about?” Helen asked curiously. “Yer dang tootin’ there little lady,” Applejack nodded. “That’s right,” Rainbow agreed. “We’ve fought witches, wizards, monsters, giants, and even ghosts.” “Sounds amazing!” Charity said amazed. “Like something straight from a book of fairy tales.” “It sure does, doesn’t it?” Twilight agreed. “Anyway, now that we’re all introduced, why not tell us about yourselves?” Barnum and Charity looked toward each other with a smile before turning back to the Equestria group. “Very well,” Barnum agreed. “It all started many years ago, when my father took me to Charity’s home for business…” <> (Flashback): A young Phineas Barnum stood outside a tailor shop as he stared through the display window toward a very fancy-looking red coat and a top hat. Having grown up poor for most of his life, he was not able to enjoy the finer things in life. His father worked as a tailor, but a job such as that did not always provide very much money. This was evident as he looked down at his worn down shoes that were falling apart at the seams with his toes sticking right out the front. Looking back toward the store, he imagined someday having a wonderful life filled with glory and riches. These thoughts were interrupted the moment his father, Philo Barnum, departed the shop. “I understand, yes,” He informed the shopkeeper. “Thank you so much, Mr. Jeffries. Thank you. You’ll have the money by the end of the day.” He grabbed Phineas and pulled him down the street. “Let’s go,” He instructed. Phineas stopped and looked back toward the shop one last time when the sound of a train whistle blew through the air. “Phineas, hurry up!” Philo urged his son. “We’re going to miss the train.” Phineas and his father hopped aboard the train that took them to the other side of Connecticut, where they had business to attend at the Hallet manor. Walking down the road to the manor, Phineas and his father carried their material and supplies needed for tailoring. As they neared the front door, Philo looked down toward his son. “Stand up straight,” He instructed. “Wipe that muck off.” Fixing his appearance, Phineas and Philo made their way toward the manor where they were directed toward the sitting room by the master of the house, Mr. Hallet. While Philo aided Mr. Hallet with tailoring his new suit, Phineas was focused on something else entirely. For sitting across the room at the grand dining table was a young girl about his age with blonde hair wearing a lovely blue dress. The young Charity was given etiquette lessons like a proper young lady, all while sneaking glances toward Phineas. The young Barnum decided to try and make her laugh as he picked up a small wooden dish beside him and placed a winder into the little hole on the top. Placing a small scrap of parchment paper into the cup, he stared back toward Charity and pretended he was sipping a teacup. Charity looked at him curiously as Phineas sucked the paper to his mouth in a rather humorous fashion. This caused Charity to do a spit take, spilling her tea all over her blue dress and they both laughed. “Charity, come here!” Mr. Hallet spoke sternly. Charity approached her father, who looked with such disappointment on his face. “Your dress!” He pointed out. “Is this how we’ve taught you to behave?” Charity looked toward the ground in shame and poor Phineas couldn’t bear to see her scolded for something he caused. It was then he decided to step into the conversation. “It’s my fault sir,” He confessed. “I made her laugh.” Mr. Hallet approached Phineas and stared him down with a blank expressionless face. “Well… thank you for your honesty,” He said. *SLAP!!!* Everyone gasped as Mr. Hallet whacked poor young Phineas right across the face and scowled at him. “Stay away from my daughter,” He ordered. Mr. Hallet walked away as he grabbed Charity by the wrist and yanked her after him. All the while Charity looked back at Phineas feeling really bad about what her father had done to him. Phineas looked back at her as well and was feeling both humiliated and also regretful for getting Charity into trouble. <> Later that same day, the sun was setting over the ocean as Phineas at down by the beach and just looked out across the water. The sound of footsteps caused him to look behind him and spot Charity approaching him to sit along the sand. “How’d you get out?” He asked her. “The window,” Charity responded. “Father is sending me to finishing school. I don’t know what the future will be.” Phineas looked back at her as a smile spread its way onto his lips. “I do,” He said. Focusing solely on each other, though having only just met, Phineas and Charity both knew what this meant as the young boy began to sing. <> Soon as the story ended, many of the ponies and Spike had teary eyes at hearing such a romantic story. To think Phineas and Charity defied the odds and came together despite Charity’s parents being against the idea. Now here they were: Happily married with two beautiful little girls. The very thought made Erik wrap his arm around his now much smaller wife and placed a gentle hand upon her stomach. Rarity smiled at him, placing her hoof over his hand as the pair imagined just exactly the same sort of future for them and their child. “That sure was a very lovely tale,” Twilight smiled. “I’m only sorry Mr. and Mrs. Hallet didn’t approve of you, Mr. Barnum.” “Don’t worry about them none,” Phineas scoffed. “We stopped caring about what they think a long time ago. This is the life Cherry and I decided to build for ourselves. Nothing is going to change that.” The two parents smiled at one another before sharing a quick kiss and pulled their little daughters close to them. “We really appreciate you not bringing the cops in,” Rara spoke appreciatively. “But I think it’s about time we try finding some place to lay our heads for the night.” The Equestria group stood up and started their way towards the door when Barnum quickly stood up. “Oh now we can’t in good conscious let you go out with no place to sleep,” He told them. “If you’d like, you’re more than welcome to stay here with us. It may be a little craped, but we can make due.” The group turned back toward the Barnum’s with appreciative smiles. “You sure we won’t be a bother?” Rarity asked. “None at all,” Charity spoke up. “You all seem like very lovely folk, surely we can’t send you out into the streets. So it’s decided, you’ll stay here with us.” “How can we possibly say ‘no’ to that offer?” Spike responded. “Simply put, you can’t,” Barnum joked. Everyone laughed at Phineas’ joke as they gathered together in the living room to talk some more. While the group continued conversing, Rara stayed behind as she approached the window to gaze out toward the evening sky. A gentle hoof came over her shoulder and she turned toward Applejack, who eyed her with great concern. “Ah know yer worried Rara,” Applejack told her. “But ah promise you, everything will work out in the end. We’ll find a way tah get ya the recognition ya deserve and there ain’t nothin’ and no one that’ll ever doubt you again.” Rara took a deep breath, as she returned her gaze back out the window. “I really hope you’re right A.J.,” Rara spoke softly. “I really do.” A Genius IdeaAuthor's Note Again if you want to see the full version of the chapter with lyrics included, you can find it on Wattpad A Genius Idea The very next day, Barnum and Erik arose bright and early before anyone else. Together, they made their way to the local bank where they both now sat waiting to speak with the bank director. Erik still felt uncertain about this little endeavor that Barnum concocted due to the unpredictability that it held. Then again, had he listened to those very same doubts back when he was still caged up and advertised as the ‘Devil’s Child’, he’d never have risen to the heights he was at now. For the moment, Erik was willing to help Barnum with his grand scheme. He only hoped that he would not regret it down the road. There they both sat upon the long bench, along with a bunch of other gentlemen waiting to see the director. “I hope you’re correct about this,” Erik sighed. “Trust me my friend,” Barnum assured. “This willwork for all of us.” “’The goat prices go up, so the pork bellies go down’…” Barnum turned toward the bench to someone reading a newspaper. He noticed a pair of legs that barely even folded down over the bench. Whoever this person was, clearly they were quite short. The door to the director’s office swung open and a middle-aged woman walked out looking less than pleased. “Charles, we’re leaving!” She spoke agitated. “This bank only wants to lend money to people ‘with’ money.” No sooner she spoke when the person holding the newspaper put it down to reveal a dwarf of a man who hopped off the bench and followed his mother. While walking, he noticed Phineas looking at him in amazement and gave him in turn a dirty look. “What are you looking at, flop-doodle?” He insulted. Barnum merely watched as the two left, with a look of complete awe. Not only that, but so too was Erik, who watched the two walk away. He’d seen his fair share of dwarves back when he worked in the circus. Many of them, like all the others, who beat and humiliated him. And yet there were a select few who were actually kind to him, even making sure he was fed… specifically ‘one’ dwarf. Both of their thoughts were disrupted the moment the bank director called out to them. “Mr. Barnum.” Both men stood up and made their way toward the director’s office, but not before a big burly man stood before Erik. “I believe Mr. Koffman called for Mr. Barnum, not you,” He spoke sternly. “Worry not sir,” Barnum quickly interjected. “He’s my business partner.” The guard studied Erik up and down before stepping off to the side, allowing Erik and Barnum to enter Mr. Koffman’s office. Both of them took a seat before Koffman’s desk and the bank director looked at them expectantly. “Now then, what is it that you wish to inquire about today?” He asked them. “Well sir, my business partner and myself would like to inquire about receiving a ten thousand dollar lone,” Barnum informed flat out. Koffman released a chuckle and wiped a lone tear that threatened to escape from his eye. “Surely you can’t be serious,” He said. “We are gravely serious good monsieur,” Erik replied. “We seek to use this money to invest in a place where men, women, and children of all ages may experience the unnatural and bizarre in a way they’ve never have before.” “This venture you propose is risky and somewhat bizarre,” Koffman responded uncertainly. “It is a good best is what it is, sir,” Barnum assured. “People don’t want to admit it, but they’re fascinated with the exotic and the macabre. It’s why we stare at it.” Koffman looked between both men, studying their intentions before sighing to himself with a shake of his head. “The bank is going to need substantial collateral,” He told them. “Of course. I, uh—I wouldn’t suggest otherwise,” Barnum replied. The man himself reached deep in his coat pocket, drawing out a little pamphlet which he hands to the bank director himself. “The deed and title to my entire flotilla of trading vessels.” Erik reached into his own coat pocket and handed another piece of paper. “As well as the deed to my opera house,” He said. Barnum looked toward Erik with confusion, wondering why he would want to put his own opera house for collateral. However, a single knowing look from the Phantom made the smile return to Barnum’s face as they both faced Koffman once more. “I believe this will be more than enough collateral,” Barnum smirked. Koffman gave no word and merely grabbed the loan request to which he applied the stamp of approval. <> Later that very same day, Barnum and Erik led Charity, the girls, and the rest of the Equestrians down the street towards what they hoped would be their ticket to the finer life. Following their incursion to the bank earlier, Barnum asked Erik to retrieve the girls and Spike while he used to money for the investment that was needed. Erik really put all his trust in Phineas Barnum, he only hoped he wouldn’t make him regret it or else he’d make sure that he did. Eventually, the group met with Phineas, who helped to escort them down the road. “I hope you all are ready to see this,” He said excitedly. “I still don’t understand dear,” Charity said confused. “Why would a bank loan us $10,000?” “Because we put up collateral.” “But dear, we don’t have any collateral.” “Sure we do,” Barnum retorted. “In the South China Seas.” “In the South China Seas?” Charity questioned. “Deep in the South China Seas,” Barnum chuckled. “That’s really great for you and all, no disrespect or anything, but what does any of that have to do with us?” Rainbow asked. “Because your ‘phantom’ friend is going to be my business partner,” Barnum replied, referring to Erik. The girls and Spike faced Erik with raised eyebrows, but none higher than Rarity. “So… you decided to venture off on a business acquisition and you didn’t think to tell me?” Rarity asked. “Believe me mon ange, the matter is far more complicated than that,” Erik responded. “How so?” Erik gestured her to come closer, whispering the truth of everything in her ear. After hearing it, she looked over Barnum almost with a look of sorrow and pity in her eyes. “How horrible…” She whispered. “Indeed,” Erik nodded. “I hope you know what you are doing,” Rarity spoke, with a headshake. “How did you end up tied to this in the first place?” “Barnum put his sunken ships as collateral, and I put up my opera house.” “WHAT?!?!” Rarity yelled. The shout was so loud it made everyone freeze and look toward them in shock. This, of course, made Rarity blush furiously in embarrassment. “Sorry everyone,” She apologized. Barnum and his family merely shrugged, as they continued down the road while the Mane Six, Rara, and Spike came over to join in on their conversation. “What’s wrong Rarity?” Twilight asked. “Apparently my husband informed me that he put up his own opera house as collateral for this little business venture,” Rarity replied, slightly upset. “Now why would ya go and do somethin’ like that Erik?” Applejack asked. “I’ve done some dumb things in my life, but never anything that ‘stupid’,” Rainbow added. “Relax everyone,” Erik assured. “You truly think I’d do something like that wihtout having a trick up my sleeve?” This caused everyone to look at him more confused than ever. “What do you mean?” Fluttershy asked. “I gave him the ‘deed’, but never said it was the real one,” Erik smiled mischievously. “I’ve kept dozens of copies of the deed to my opera house back in Paris. So even if this venture fails, it will be quite difficult for them to seize my property… when it technically doesn’t exist to them.” “Erick that’s… actually really smart!” Twilight spoke amazed. “Yeah, it does make sense!” Spike agreed. Though she was still quite peeved he didn’t tell her of his plan, Rarity smiled as Erik knelt down and they both shared an embrace and a kiss. “I must admit my dearest, that was quite the ruse,” She spoke with admiration. “And what did we buy with this loan?” Charity asked. The group finally reached the end of the road where a big building stood, recently refurbished and now with a large banner hanging out front. “’Barnum’s American Museum of Curiosities’,” Barnum read with pride. “What kind of museum is it?” Rara asked. “A place to be transported,” Barnum answered. “A place where people can see things they’ve never seen before.” <> “Wax figures?” Inside the museum, everyone stood around looking in confusion at the sight of many different wax figures of historical figures. There were also figures of animals, one person beheaded by a guillotine, and various other weird and rather ‘unentertaining’ subjects. “Yeah…” Barnum nodded, leading the tour. “They’re all the rage in Europe. Look, Marie Antoinette with the sore throat. Napoleon. Come here. See? You’ve already met some of the most famous folks in history. But they’re not all wax.” He led the group toward a man standing off the side wearing a dirty worn outfit. He had a thick pushy beard and wore a bowler hat over his head. He was a mangy looking man, who made everyone slightly nervous. “This is the great… O’Malley,” Barnum introduced. “Master of sleight of hand. A king of deception.” “Hmm… you don’t look like a magician,” Pinkie spoke, confused. “Where’s your cape? Your magic wand? And that cute little rabbit you pull out of a hat?” O’Malley just looked toward her with a bored blank expression. “I’m a thief,” He spoke flatly. “A very ‘good’ thief,” Barnum smiled. “I caught him nicking my watch.” And you thought it would be a good idea to hire him instead of calling the police?” Erik asked. To which Barnum just shrugged in response. Just then, the two little girls caught sight of something that made them gasp in amazement. “An elephant!” They exclaimed excitedly. “Not just any elephant,” Barnum spoke, leading them. “Oh, yeah. This is a ten-ton bull straight from the plains of Africa. And look at that.” He pointed to the side where a gigantic stuffed giraffe looked upon them from a great height. “The tallest giraffe in the world.” “Can I climb up its leg?” Caroline asked hopefully. “Absolutely not.” “Cuz nothing says, ‘Come in and have a good time’ like sore throats, beheadings, and big animals," Rainbow spoke sarcastically. "Hush up now," Applejack scolded her. “Okay… I know how it looks,” Barnum spoke nervously. “If you didn’t, I’d be worried,” Charity chuckled. “I mean, it just needs a little work, but…” “The loan has to be paid back every month.” “Oh yeah, we’re gonna pay it,” Barnum spoke determined. “We just need customers. Hundreds of them. We’re gonna get them.” <> Later on, Barnum and his family were busy advertising for the museum. The girls and Spike already decided to head back to the apartment so they wouldn’t get in the way. Not that they really thought that the business was going to succeed because quite frankly it seemed rather… boring. “Welcome to the Barnum Museum!” Barnum announced to the people. “It is one hour of your time, sir, but it will change your life.” “We have shows on the hour, every hour!” Charity added. “I love your dress,” Caroline complimented a passing woman. “Surely not for the faint of heart, but I can tell you’re gonna love it,” Barnum continued. “Half price for anyone who’s wearing a hat. Ho, ho! That’s you, sir.” However, it quickly became apparent that no one was interested as they threw the fliers on the ground and walked all over them. “Loads of garbage.” “Goodness, no. It’s rubbish.” Seeing the people walk away and throwing their advertisements away made Barnum extremely nervous. He quickly raced to the ticket booth O’Malley was working and looked toward the thief. “How many tickets?” He asked. “Three,” O’Malley answered flatly. Barnum turned around toward his wife and two girls standing there holding three tickets, the only three tickets that had been sold at all. Barnum sighed in disappointment over the fact this clearly was not going well. <> Later that night, Barnum came home for the evening following a long, uneventful day at the museum. Charity and the girls had already gone home long ago, following hours upon hours of absolutely no business. Barnum walked through the front door, finding his wife sleeping on the couch and Fluttershy gently laying a blanket over her while she slept. Barnum gave a small nod of gratitude toward the little Pegasus for taking care of his wife as he walked over and knelt beside her. At that moment, the rest of the Mane Six, Rara, Spike, and Erik approached to greet him. “How did the rest of the day go?” Twilight asked. “Got any more business?” Spike added hopefully. Barnum looked toward them and just gave a sad shake of his head. “Aww don’t beat yourself up just yet,” Pinkie smiled. “Tomorrow’s a brand new day. I’m sure it’ll be filled with nothing but sunshine and new adventures.” “No offense Pinkie, but you think that ‘every’ day,” Rainbow said. “At least she’s thinking positively darling,” Rarity shot at her. “Daddy.” The sounds of his daughters calling for him spread a smile across Phineas’s face, as he walked into their room with the ponies, Spike, and Erik following closely behind. Both Caroline and Helen lay snug in their beds as the group walked in and smiled at them. “Ah thought we done put y’all two tah bed an hour ago,” Applejack chuckled. “We wanted to make sure daddy got home safely,” Helen replied. “Did you sell any more tickets today?” Caroline asked her father. “A few, yeah,” Phineas nodded. “Most everyone was rushing home, it’s Friday, but… we sold a few.” “I think you have too many dead things in your museum, Daddy,” Caroline spoke honestly. This made everyone chuckle over how brutally honest this little girl could be. “Do you?” Phineas chuckled. “She’s right,” Rara agreed. “You need something alive. Something amazing beyond words that people will pay to see.” “Honestly, I don’t think people want to pay to stare at dead things,” Rainbow added. “I wouldn’t.” This again garnered another chuckle from Phineas Barnum, who looked down toward his daughters with a loving smile. “I’ll see what I can do,” He told them. “Go to sleep, both of you.” “Something sensational,” Caroline replied. “That’s a big word.” “It’s your word.” “Something that isn’t stuffed,” Helen added. Soon Barnum and the Equestrian group made their way from the bedroom and back into the living room. “Those girls really are smart beyond their years,” Twilight marveled. “They know what the show needs,” Erik nodded. “It needs spectacles, living and breathing. Things that make people drop their jaws in disbelief, but they’ll keep coming back anyway. I must admit, though my time was horrific, people from all around flocked at the chance to see myself and all the other acts at the fair… because this was how we make our living.” “Yeah, but where would you find any of those?” Rainbow asked. All of a sudden, Phineas’ face lit up as another idea came to his head. Slowly turning back around, he looked toward the pony bunch and their dragon companion. Kneeling to their height, he looked at them all dead in the eye. “Kind of like all of you,” He said. “What do you mean darling?” Rarity asked. “How would all of you like to be in my show?” He asked them. “Um… don’t you think it might be weird for people to see a bunch of colorful talking ponies?” Rara asked. “And… a talking dragon?” Spike pointed at himself. “That’s the whole point of my show,” Barnum replied. “To show people fascinating and exciting things they have never seen before. With all of you at my side, I have no doubt in my mind that everyone will pay to see the show.” The ponies and Spike looked back and forth at one another as they thought about his proposal. On one hand, it was risky exposing themselves in a place where they have no idea how the people would react. Then again, that certainly never stopped them on many of their adventures and somehow it all worked out fine. Also, they’d hate to see their new friends out on the streets, so the answer overall was not difficult to think about. “We’re in Mr. Barnum,” Twilight agreed. She held out her hoof, to which Phineas greatly accepted and shook. “Okay, you have colorful ponies and a teenage dragon,” Rainbow pointed out. “I still think you need a bit more to keep people interesting.” Thinking about where to possibly find more acts for his new show, Phineas smiled again as he recalled something from earlier that day. “I think I know just who to talk to…” <> The next day, Phineas found himself walking up the front door of Gertrude Stratton. After seeing her and her son leaving the bank yesterday, he knew right away Charles was exactly what was needed for his show. Reaching the front door, he gave a gentle knock and Ms. Stratton answered not even a minute later. She was rather confused seeing some random man at her door. “You must be Gertrude Stratton,” Phineas smiled. “I’m looking for your son.” “I don’t have a son,” She replied. “The hospital record says you do. Charles, right? Age 22?” “Look here sir, my son already has enough people who want to make him feel smaller than he already is, and I really don’t…” “Please miss, I don’t wish any harm on you or your son,” Phineas assured. “I only require a few minutes of his time to offer him an amazing opportunity.” Though Ms. Stratton clearly did not trust the man, she stepped aside and allowed him entry before leading him to the living area. “Charles!” She called. “Charles!” The sound of a door unlocking was heard before it opened to reveal the diminutive Charles Stratton who walked into the room. Upon seeing Phineas Barnum looking at him with a smile, the small man grumbled. Nonetheless, Phineas knelt down to his height. “P.T. Barnum, at your service,” He greeted. “I am putting together a show and I need a star.” “You want people to laugh at me,” Charles grumbled. “Well, they’re laughing anyway, kid, so might as well get paid,” Barnum joked. “I see a soldier, no, a general riding across the stage with a sword and a gun, and—and—and the most beautiful uniform ever seen.” Charles just looked at Barnum like he was crazy, yet Phineas kept a complete straight face. “People will come from all over the world, and when they do they will not laugh… they’ll salute,” He promised. “How do I know that I can trust you?” Charles asked. “You can’t,” Phineas responded. “But what do you have to lose.” “I’m not like everyone else,” Charles spoke sadly. To which Phineas responded with a smile. “No one ever made a difference by being like everyone else.” This caused Charles to smile and stick out his tiny hand to which Barnum shook. <> Across town, Erik and Rarity assisted with looking for acts for the show. With Barnum looking for Charles Stratton, Erik promised he’d help him find exactly what he needed. After all, they were business partners and if this endeavor was to work, they needed to work together. So for right now, they were putting up fliers across town as they scoured the area for acts. All of a sudden, some man from across the way cleared his throat and got the former Phantom’s attention. “Hey!” He called. “You looking for freaks? I know where you can find one of them.” “Where?” He asked. “Cross the way you’ll find a laundry house,” The man informed. “There’ll be a woman who works there. Real freak of nature that one. If you ask me, shoulda put her in a madhouse at birth.” The man let out a laugh which made Erik fume with rage. Those were exactly the same sort of things people used to say of him when he was caged like an animal at the fair all those years ago. Those sort of things are what drove him to madness. Looking down toward his wife at his side, he could also see she was angry as well. Insulting people simply for being different from everyone was one thing she could not stand. Looking up at her husband, she only gave him a curt nod and he nodded back. Reeling back he unloaded a powerful shot to the side of the man’s face and knocked him out cold. Rubbing his now sore knuckles, he and Rarity walked off to where he had told them about. After walking a few blocks, they finally found the laundry house and walked inside. The moment they did, they could instantly hear a melodious harmony throughout the entire establishment. Walking into the cleaning area, they found many women washing sheets and other clothing. One woman walked up to him, to which Erik bowed his head. “Hello,” He greeted. “Sir, you shouldn’t be here,” The woman said. “My apologies. I was just passing by, and I wanted to know who was singing.” All at once, the singing stopped, and Erik turned over to a woman peeking over a freshly cleaned hanging sheet. When she noticed him looking at her, she quickly ducked back down. “It’s you, isn’t it?” Erik approached her. “Sir, I’ll have to ask you to leave,” She spoke quietly. “You are so talented, blessed…” When Erik pulled back the sheet to look upon her, both he and Rarity looked rather shocked by what they saw. For the woman, Lettie Lutz, was no ordinary woman. She had all the qualities of a woman, but the major difference was the thick bushy beard that went down her face. The sight was truly one to behold, as they both stared at her, which made the poor woman feel completely self-conscious. “Extraordinary!” Erik marveled. “Unique… I’d even say ‘beautiful’.” This caused most of the women in the area to chuckle, to which only made Lettie feel even worse about her appearance. “Sir, please leave me alone,” She nearly begged. “They don’t understand now, but they will,” Erik assured her. “How can you look at me and not turn away?” “Darling, if I was truly ‘that’ heartless,” Rarity spoke up. “I would never have married my husband here.” Lettie looked down toward the miniscule marshmallow unicorn standing next to the tall brooding ‘opera ghost’. Looking between the two, she couldn’t help but be confused. On one hand, the talking unicorn was strange enough… but it is the choice of words she said which proved all the more confusing. “Your… husband?” She asked. “Yes, I know it must seem very confusing and let me tell you that’s quite the long story,” Rarity said. “Anyway, the point is my husband Erik was treated as an outcast at a young age simply due to his appearance. Why they even kept him in a cage as part of a freak show where he was constantly humiliated.” “It’s true…” Erik nodded. “Why?” Lettie questioned. “There’s nothing wrong with him.” “You only see my ‘new’ form dear woman,” Erik replied. “Rarity, I’d like you to show her what I truly am… or was…” “Are you quite certain dear?” Rarity asked unsure. Erik only gave a light nod and knelt to her side, silently granting her permission. Rarity took a deep breath and lit her horn with a magic aura before touching it toward the side of her husband’s face. The moment Erik stood back up, facing Lettie, she was surprised when she saw his now deformed face. “See? I’m not so unlike yourself,” Erik spoke. “I was born with this deformity that caused my own mother to fear and hate me. When I was a boy, she sold me to a traveling fair where I was locked in a cage and beaten daily. I was presented as ‘the Devil’s Child’, and the people would laugh and scorn at me for years…” Lettie glanced toward the deformed man for a few moments before Rarity used her magic to shift his face back to normal once more. “Not only did he start at the bottom,” Rarity added. “But he had a fiery passion and a voice that could rival the world’s greatest Opera singers.” “Wait… what?” Lettie asked. “When he performed on that stage, he had audiences so captivated that they could never look away. When they heard his voice, they all felt like they were entranced. He was so magnificent; he stole my heart the day I first met him.” “What are you trying to say?” “I’m saying, we see a spark in you waiting to burn into a fiery inferno!” Rarity continued. “When I look at you, I see a person with passion, much like my beloved husband Erik.” “Do you truly believe I have such a passion in me?” Lettie asked. “We do…” Erik smiled. <> Soon the news was spread far across the town, as fliers and posters were made at every corner. All promoting the same message: ‘WANTED! UNIQUE PERSONS! CURIOSITIES! DARING ACTS! WONDERS OF THE WORLD!’. An open invitation for those who consider themselves different from the normal world to come meet at Barnum’s American Museum, for a chance to turn their oddities into marvels. It wasn’t long before several of those wonders in question stumbled upon those notes and while hesitant at first they still decided to take that chance. All of the strangest beings known to man were soon lining up to ‘apply’ for Barnum’s museum, all coming in a vast variety of appearances. From a man with hair all over his body, to one who stood as tall as the mountains themselves. There was a portly man with a rather queer personality and a woman with curly hair as white as snow. So many unique types of people hoping to offer something life-changing with this opportunity. By this point, Barnum and Erik were in the midst of an interview with a pair of African-American siblings. “Okay… Anne and W.D. Wheeler,” Phineas noted. “Brother and sister?” “Yes, sir,” Anne answered. “Terrific!” Erik marveled. “And what do you do?” “Trapeze.” “Trapeze… okay,” Erik nodded. “You know, people aren’t gonna like it,” W.D. spoke up. “If you put us on the stage.” “Oh, I’m counting on it,” Barnum assured confidently. “So… when can you start?” Erik asked. And with every act accepted into his museum, the girls, along with Spike, immediately went to work on the posters to promote each act Barnum brought in. For he knew with all these promising acts, they were sure to make the money they’d need to not only pay off the loan by the end of the month… but to indeed reach for that future beyond Barnum’s wildest dreams. And the hiring of the Wheeler siblings was not the end of it… <> “Is this over… your…” Phineas gestured. “Entire body…” The tattooed man confirmed. “Terrific!” Erik replied. “We don’t need to see it.” <> “Now.” The ‘Dog Boy’ pounced onto the top of the table, which made Barnum and Erik laugh with excitement. No other words were enough to describe this marvelous act before their eyes. They knew right then and there that this young man would be perfect for the museum. “You… are… hired!” Erik applauded. <> “Can I ask how heavy you are?” Barnum asked the portly man. “Do you have a number for that?” “I prefer not to say, but…” The portly man began. “Just between us,” Erik assured. “500 pounds…” The man whispered. “750 pounds, you said?” Barnum smiled. “750 pounds, it is!” The man giggled. <> “What is your name?” Barnum asked the tall man. “Vasily Palvos, sir,” The man introduced himself. “Yeah… we’ll need to change your name,” Erik replied. “How do you feel about being ‘Irish’?” <> “We have a show!” Barnum shook Erik’s hands. “The new poster’s ready gentlemen!” Rarity sing-sung. The girls laid out the new banner for Barnum’s museum and unfolded the final piece for display before the gentlemen. “That’s wonderful, mon ange!” Erik smiled. “But we need it five times bigger!” “Yes! And I want it everywhere!” Barnum instructed. “Carriages, sides of trains, trolleys, crates, milk bottles, everywhere they look!” “Okie-dokie-lokie, P.T.!!!” Pinkie replied, with a thumbs up. “One series of 5x posters for ‘Barnum’s American Museum’ coming right up!” And as the girls carried the banner to make the adjustments necessary, Barnum took note of what the pink Party pony mentioned. “P.T. Barnum…” Barnum thought, smiling. “I love it!” Soon, everything was coming along in more ways than Barnum could possibly imagine. All the banners hung high and proud over the museum for everyone in the city to see. Soon word would spread of all these astonishing oddities that Barnum himself brought together to stand before them as living pieces of art for their viewing pleasure. And as Barnum stood outside seeing the public who were bound to come together to bear witness to these marvels, his thoughts turned to a future that would soon dawn upon him and his troupe like the rays of sun. A dream that was finally going to become… a reality. https://m. Hundreds of people turned to thousands, as they lined up at the ticket booth paying their coins for tickets to see this show. And thanks to the money, not only were they able to pay off the loan, but they had more than enough for the finest clothing a man can afford. In which case, the most breathtaking uniforms for Barnum and Erik to wear before the public’s eyes, bright colors for Barnum and a fancy new dark tuxedo just for the former ‘Phantom’. Course they made a few extra adjustments for their marvels, making the Heavy man, a.k.a. the ‘Lord of Leeds’, ‘heavier’ and the Tall Man ‘taller’. The time was soon coming for the group to present themselves before their public but to say folks like Lettie were nervous was an understatement. Suddenly, the giant lost his balance as he tried to assume the new height given to him. And despite the efforts of his fellow performers and the Equestrians, the giant’s stumbling released the curtain unveiling their presence before a rather stunned audience. And from the very moment their eyes locked upon these strange, abnormal beings they couldn’t help but gasp with shock. For a moment, during a long awkward silence between the acts and the audience, Barnum and the others toward a nervous Lettie who was in no hurry to unveil herself before the people. “Lettie! Lettie!” Barnum ushered. “They’re waiting!” “For what?” Lettie asked. “For you, of course,” Erik insisted. “No…” “It’s okay to be scared, I know how that feels,” Fluttershy assured. “But I think you can truly be great, if you’d just try.” “Fluttershy’s right dear,” Rarity agreed. “They don’t know it yet… but they are going to love you!” “Trust us,” Barnum smiled. Eventually, they were able to convince Lettie to join her fellow performers despite the shock of an astounded audience. All that remained was convincing ‘Tom’ to go out. There he stood dressed as Napoleon, but they knew he had to be out there in order to make the showcase complete. “Tom!” Barnum shouted. “Up, up!” With her magic aura at the ready, Twilight used her magic to lift Tom onto his steed to prepare him for his entrance. All the while Barnum applied the finishing touches so the look they were going for with the little man would be complete. And in the blink of an eye, Barnum’s vision for his museum came to fruition. The audience found themselves captivated by the display of such a tremendous assortment of marvels, especially the children many of whom could relate to being outcasts. Before their eyes, these unique individuals were like superheroes. So many varieties of sights and colors, so many backgrounds and various features. All of them different, yet they were basking under the spotlight turning what they deemed as ugly into beauty in a matter of seconds. Even Tom got really into his act like he truly believed himself to be Napoleon. Even the ponies and Spike really got into the act, perfectly able to blend in with this crowd given how unique they were in their own form. To give the show quite a ‘flare’ so to speak. Through the roaring crowd, amongst all the applause, the troupe could hear the cries of the people. All of them shouting ‘That was great!’ or ‘More!’ and one even shouting ‘Fantastic!’. Everyone in the city loved Barnum’s museum and his assembly the unnatural, all… except for one man sitting in the crowd. He just stared toward the group, putting in a few notes as if he’s seen enough to know just what he paid admission for. And little did Barnum and the group know; they were in the presence of one of the toughest critics in the entire city. <> “This is bad!” O’Malley spoke. The man dropped a newspaper before P.T. Barnum and Erik. All the others gathered around the pair, seeing the article that was just published in today’s newspaper. The few words highlighted in the paper truly stood out. “’Criminal’!” Twilight read. “’Degrading’!” Rarity gasped. “’A circus’!” Barnum pointed. “I like ‘circus’!” “Barnum’s Circus…” Pinkie pondered. “Now all we need to do is find a man named ‘Bailey’.” “Why would we want to find a guy named Bailey?” Rainbow remarked. “Exactly!” Of course, the group did not have time to think when a commotion distracted them from their thoughts. Quickly heading outside, the group were stunned by the sight before them. A mob of violent men started a fight with the troupe. There were shouts and jeers, punches thrown left and right, as the troupe fought hard to defend each other from these vicious men. “Hey!” Erik shouted. “That’s enough!” “Walter!” Barnum shouted, stopping the ‘Dog Boy’. “Inside, all of you. Right now.” The Equestrians rushed in to the performer’s aid, helping them backstage as the men continued to jeer for them. Spitting at them and shouting insults as if they were no more than animals obeying their master. “We don’t want your kind!” “Get outta here!” “That’s right, you freaks!” “Your master’s calling!” “Why don’t you come over here and say that to my face, you filthy coward!!!” Rainbow threatened. “That’s quite enough, Rainbow,” Erik spoke. “Just let them go.” Satisfied with their part, the vile men proceeded to walk away after fulfilling their ‘service’ toward the gathering crowd who were witnesses to this assault. But all they did was stand and gawk at the scene, forgetting for the fact that these ‘performers’ were still people yet were treated no better than exotic creatures in a zoo. Still Barnum’s mind was on something far bigger than a mere attack. “Reprint this review,” Barnum instructed O’Malley. “In every paper in New York. Half-price tickets to anyone who brings it in.” While Erik and he Equestrians were more concerned that Barnum seemed to have little care for that attack that occurred, whatever he planned seemed to be paying off. Those very same reviews were soon printed in all the newspapers as per the man’s instructions. Only instead, he turned the criticism completely around in their favor and those words meant to bring them down instead convinced the masses to attend their shows. So many people ended up coming, that the ticket booth was immediately closed after selling out a single show alone. And despite all the odds, despite the criticism and the violent backlash, the show kept going and Barnum even embraced the identity of being ‘The King of Humbug’. And as Barnum stood with his troupe, as he posed before his public, everyone erupted in cheers and applause. The man smiled feeling in his heart that for the first time in his life, the people ‘loved’ what he had to offer, and all those cheers were made just for him. That he got that approval from nearly everyone in the city, from his family standing in the corner and to every man, woman, and child sitting in the stands. Barnum stood in a world of spectacle and humbug… and he truly felt like a king. <> “Peanuts!” A Vendor shouted. “Get your peanuts here. Hot, salted peanuts. Piping hot!” “One for me, one for the lady!” A man ordered. Business was picking up as usual for Barnum’s American Museum, now Barnum’s Circus. As Barnum and Erik passed by, to check upon the people, they happen to catch O’Malley attempting to walk away with some money he took from the man. “O’Malley,” Barnum cleared his throat. And as O’Malley dropped his findings in Barnum’s hand, the man turned to the sight and caught a familiar face. There before them was the very critic from some of their shows who tried to tear down everything Barnum had been working to. But rather than viciously confronting the man, they instead decided to be… a little more ‘mature’ about it. “Ah, Mr. Bennet from the Herald,” Barnum greeted. “Have you met my business partner, Erik?” “Come for another show I presume?” Erik inquired. “Tell me, gentlemen, does it bother you that everything you’re selling is fake?” Mr. Bennet asked. “Do these smiles seen fake?” Barnum replied. “It doesn’t matter where they come from. The joy is real.” “So, you are philanthropists?” Bennet questioned. “Why? Is a hyperbole the worst crime?” Erik replied. “Men suffer more from imagining too little than too much,” Barnum added. “The creed of a true fraud,” Bennet remarked. “Mr. Bennet, when was the last time you smiled or had a good laugh?” Erik asked. “Like a ‘real’ laugh? A theater critic who can’t find joy in the theater… now who’s a fraud?” Getting the last word against their greatest critic, Erik and Barnum proceeded to walk away in triumph. But Barnum was not quite finished. “Oh, Mr. Bennet,” Barnum spoke up. “That word you used to describe my show? Has a nice ring to it.” Now Barnum was finished with Mr. Bennet, as he and Erik proceeded to leave to proceed with their business. Course their conversation had not gone unnoticed, as Rara peered in from hiding upon listening to the way the men handled their critic. Seeing Erik, she stepped around to approach him. “How do you do it Erik?” Rara asked curiously. “He said ‘all’ that mean stuff about us, and you, and our show… yet you just handled it like his words meant nothing. How did you do that?” “Take my advice my friend,” Erik suggested. “Never let them see they’re getting to you… that’s how they win.” “They ‘really’ don’t bother you anymore, do they?” “Well… not ‘anymore’. I was an emotionally unbalanced man back in Paris, but you ponies saved my life… now I just want to be the bigger man. Try it sometime… I think you’ll be surprised.” And just like that, Erik walks away to rejoin Barnum leaving Rara to ponder Erik’s words. Standing by herself wondering if maybe there was some slight merit in Erik’s advice. Show BusinessA few weeks passed since the first show performed by the P.T. Barnum Circus. Since that day, there had been many more shows with an even higher attendance than the first. It surprised Barnum, Erik, and the Equestrians just how successful the show had actually gotten in such a short amount of time. Now it is true they had their fair share of incidents, with critics' reviews and altercations with those who believe the show to be nothing but a glorified freak-show. However, this did nothing to deter Barnum or Erik from their show. As a matter of fact, all it had done was encourage them to keep going bigger and better. Before too long, the show had gotten so successful that Barnum had enough money to sell the run-down apartment that his family and their new friends had been staying in and purchase a new piece of property. It was going to be a grand surprise for Charity and the girls. Now here they were with Barnum leading his wife and daughters, with their eyes covered, toward their new home. “And right this way,” He ushered excitedly. “Don’t you think there’s enough blind trust in my life?” Charity giggled. “Well, isn’t that what makes it fun?” Right behind, Erik, Spike, and the girls followed closely behind as they spoke. “Ooh, this is so exciting!” Twilight smiled happily. “I am so happy for Mr. Barnum and his family.” “I just can’t believe how quickly thinks turned around for Mr. Barnum,” Spike replied. “I mean a few weeks ago, he was on the verge of going completely broke. Now he’s pleasantly wealthy and moving to a new place.” “That’s the power of positivity little dude,” Rainbow nodded. “Now don’t go playin’ innocent now hun,” Applejack scoffed. “Ya’ll weren’t exactly bein’ positive before when Phineas and Erik first came up with this here idea.” “I said I was sorry!” “Yeah, I heard you,” Applejack responded. “Oh, please don’t argue you two,” Fluttershy pleaded. “Especially not when things are going so well.” Both Rainbow and A.J. sighed as they looked at one another for a moment before finally speaking. “Ah’m sorry,” Applejack apologized. “Me too,” Rainbow nodded. Just then, Pinkie popped up in between them and wrapped both hooves around their shoulders. “There now you see, that’s the spirit!” Pinkie smiled happily. “Every pony loves each other, we’re having super-duper Pinkie Pie fun, and making money while doing it. And besides, how many carriages have we ridden that were pulled by a zebra before?” True to her word, when they awoke that morning, Barnum and his family picked them all up in a magnificent carriage being pulled by a zebra. It was certainly wacky to say the least, but then again, they were involved in circus work, so it made sense. Phineas helped Charity out of the carriage while guiding her forward. “Keep coming,” He instructed. “Okay, are you ready?” Removing the blindfold, Barnum smiled as Charity stared wide eyed at what she saw before her. It was the old run-down mansion they visited when they were children. It had obviously since been reupholstered and remodeled to where it was all shiny and brand new. Charity and even the Equestria group all seemed quite shocked at the sight of the large mansion that stood before them. “Is it?” Charity gasped. “It is,” Phineas smiled. “Wow!” Twilight gasped in shock. “I couldn’t have said it better myself darling,” Rarity nodded. “This is absolutely magnificent. However did you manage to do all this?” It was then Erik stepped up alongside his wife and friends. “Well, he certainly didn’t do it alone,” He smirked. “While he handled the performances of the show, I handled the operation and money. So, I was able to take some of the money, hired the best architects in New York, and arranged for them to work night and day to bring this mansion back to glory.” Everyone turned to Erik with wide eyes and bright smiles. “You did this for us?” Charity asked. “Of course!” Erik nodded. “I couldn’t very well let the co-owner of Barnum and Bailey’s Circus and his family live in squalor.” “Barnum and Bailey’s?” Rara asked confused. “Ah yes, my new alias name… James Anthony Bailey.” Barnum approached the former opera ghost and placed a single hand on his shoulder as he looked at him with a most grateful look. “Thank you, my friend,” He smiled. “I cannot even begin to express my gratitude for what you have done for me and my family.” Erik merely nodded his head in thanks as Barnum walked back up beside his wife and daughters. “Come on. Let’s go.” Soon the entire group walked forward towards the new house. Both Caroline and Helen put their hands on the two big front doors of the manor and pushed with all their might. The door opened wide and as they walked into the mansion, all eyes looked around in amazement over the fine décor and all the extravagant designs of the mansion. Clearly no expense was spared during the renovation of this mansion. “Wow!” Charity gasped. “It’s so beautiful!” Rarity smiled. “I have similar plans for a new home for you and I that will be constructed upon our return home,” Erik informed his wife. “You can still have your boutique just as you love it and come home to a wonderful home every night. A lovely place for our family to grow.” Rarity had a few tears springing from her eyes as she literally jumped into her husband’s arms and they both embraced tightly. As they were doing this, the two Barnum girls were still admiring their new house. “Helen, that’s for you.” Barnum gestured to a lovely looking dollhouse which Helen ran straight over to and started playing with it. Barnum then handed a beautifully wrapped present to Caroline. “And, Caroline, this is for you.” Caroline ripped the wrapping paper off the present and opened the box within. She smiled brightly upon seeing a pair of ballet slippers, just like she had wished for. She threw her arms around her father who laughed upon being hugged. “There’s a ballet school right down the street,” Phineas told Charity. “Just past your parents’ house, actually.” “Don’t tell me you bought this house just to rub my parents’ noses in your success?” She responded. “Well, that wasn’t the ‘only’ reason,” Phineas said, before sharing a kiss. “This is the life I promised you. Shall we?” He then grabbed her hand in his as they began to waltz around the grand foyer, smiling happily as they did so. “Phin… it’s beautiful, but you know, we don’t need all of this to be—” Charity found herself cut off when Phineas lifted her into the air and spun her around causing her to laugh. “It only took me 25 years, but… welcome home, Charity Barnum,” Phineas said proudly. Off to the side, Caroline walked up to the Equestrian group. “Um can I ask you guys for a favor?” She asked. “Of course, sweetie,” Fluttershy nodded. “Ask away.” “Can you please watch me practice my ballet so I can rehearse performing for a crowd?” “Of course, Caroline, we’d be honored,” Twilight nodded. Rainbow Dash started taking a few steps back. “Um, you’ll have to excuse me,” Rainbow said. “I have something to do that won’t allow me to stay much longer. See ya!” She tried to take off and fly into the air but found she couldn’t get very far because Applejack caught her tail in her teeth. Applejack quickly pulled her marefriend down to the ground, drew out her lasso, and proceeded to tie her up and sit her back down beside her. “You’re stayin’ right here and given’ the girl yer support… or ya can ferget about havin’ anymore of mah homemade apple cider!” She threatened. With a little growl and a glare, Rainbow sat completely still as Caroline began her ballet routine. <> Later that night, the Barnum’s and even the Equestria group found themselves seated in a very fancy concert hall as they watched Caroline’s ballet recital. After watching her practice session earlier, they all could see that she was a very talented girl. She might have been a little shaky at times, but what performer wasn’t? Now they all sat and watched her perform like the little star she no doubt was destined to be. The only one who didn’t seem happy was Rainbow Dash, who sat and grumbled in sheer boredom until the show was over. By the time all was finished, everyone gathered in the grand hall for general mingling. “I think that was a marvelous performance,” Rara spoke with admiration. “Same here,” Twilight agreed. “I really think Caroline stole the show out there. The other girls were really good, but she was great!” “She certainly does have the potential to shine brightly,” Erik agreed. Off to the side, Phineas took notice of a handsome young man mingling with a few high-class patrons as they sipped their beverages and engaged in small talk. Though he put on the act of being happy, Phineas could tell this young man felt trapped by all of this. “Hey sweetheart, who’s that young man over there?” He asked Charity. “Oh, that’s Philip Carlyle,” Charity responded. “A bit of a scandal, they say. His last play was a hit in London.” “Play?” Phineas chuckled. “You pay good money to watch people stand around and talk for two hours, and they call me a con man.” Off to the side, Erik and the Equestrian group watched as Caroline made her way out from the backstage area and over to the other dancers. They also noticed how the other girls started mocking her. “Ew, hat’s that smell?” One girl asked. “Do you smell that?” “Ew, something ‘does’ smell,” The other responded. “Oh, I know what it is… peanuts.” Both girls snickered and laughed as they walked away, leaving poor Caroline standing there and feeling sad. It was then Rara approached her and placed a gentle hoof on her arm. “Pay no attention to them Caroline,” Rara said. “You were amazing out there tonight. Quite frankly, they’re just jealous of you.” Caroline gave no response and just shrugged the hoof off as she walked away. “Oh, the poor girl,” Fluttershy sighed sadly. “If there is one thing I can’t stand it’s bullies!” Rainbow spoke through gritted teeth. “Now don’t go off and do somethin’ crazy sugar cube,” Applejack told her. “Don’t worry, I won’t,” Rainbow assured. “Despite how much I ‘really’ want to…” Little did any of them know that Phineas had also seen the entire thing from the sidelines. He couldn’t help but feel sorry for his daughter. When he was younger, he suffered the same sort of scorn and mockery from children for being both the son of a tailor and homeless. Nonetheless, he tried to put on a good face for his family as they made their way from the concert hall and towards their waiting carriage. “I can see it right now,” Phineas declared proudly. “Youngest prima ballerina in the history of the city ballet.” “I’m quitting,” Caroline said flatly. “What?” Phineas asked in shock. “Why would you quit?” “I started too late. I’ll never catch up.” “Caroline, you were the best dancer on that stage.” Caroline faced her father with a deadpan expression. “What? You think I can’t spot talent?” “Ballet takes years of hard work,” Caroline responded. “It’s not like the circus. You can’t just fake it.” <> Later, back at home, Charity and Phineas sat in their room together. While Charity did her hair, Phineas was trying to figure out what to do about his daughter wanting to quite ballet. She just couldn’t quit. She was one of the best dancers on the stage and she was giving up simply because a few snobby girls stuck their noses up at her. Phineas couldn’t stand the thought of his daughter giving up. “She can’t quit,” Phineas told his wife. “No. No, I mean, she just… she just feels out of place with the other girls.” “Well, I should certainly hope so,” Charity responded. “I’ve never seen so many little prima Donnas in my life.” “Yeah, but those prima Donnas are the most important thing in the world to her right now.” “She’ll learn to ignore them just like I did,” Charity assured. “She shouldn’t have to,” Barnum replied. “New York society will never accept us.” “If they did, they’d have to stop judging and actually do something with their lives.” “This isn’t about me.” “Oh. So it’s different than everything else then?” Charity retorted. “I just want her to be proud of who she is, of her family.” “She is proud,” Charity assured. “We don’t have to be the Carlyle’s.” Hearing her say the name made Phineas freeze for a moment, and an idea popped into his head. Quickly approaching the side of the room, he grabbed his coat and hat then made his way to the door much to his wife’s confusion. “Where are you going?” She asked confused. “Just out for a bit,” Phineas responded. “But it’s already so late at night.” “Don’t worry, I won’t be too late,” Phineas smiled. Walking out the door, Phineas blew a kiss to his wife and then made his way down the hall with specific intentions in mind. Stopping in front of one of the guest room doors, he gave a quick knock to which was answered by none other than Erik. “Good evening Mr. Bailey,” Phineas jokes. “Going from a ring master to a comedian are you?” Erik asked, rolling his eyes. “How can I help you?” “I’ve found a possible new business associate for us. I need your help to convince him to join us.” Erik raised an eyebrow toward Barnum for a moment before grabbing his cloak and followed him out the door. Whatever Barnum was planning, it would either be really good… or really bad. <> Walking down the streets of New York, Erik and Phineas made their way towards the direction of the concert hall. A recent play by Philip Carlyle had just ended as people spilled out of the hall. They passed by many different patrons and other folk before finally finding the man they were looking for. For there stood Philip Carlyle himself, leaning against a stone wall with a drink in his hand and a dazed expression in his eyes as the two gentlemen walked beside him. “Mr. Carlyle,” Phineas spoke to him. “You produced this play?” “Yes, I did indeed,” Philip responded. “Refunds are available at the front box office.” This got a chuckle out of both Barnum and Erik, who merely reached their hands to shake the young man’s. “P.T. Barnum,” Phineas introduced himself. “James Anthony Bailey, at your service,” Erik greeted. “From the circus?” Philip asked. “Yes. You—you’ve been?” “God, no,” Philip chuckled. “But I have seen the crowds. People leave your shows a great deal happier than when they came in, which is much more than I can say for my play.” “And yet, you have no trouble selling tickets,” Erik responded. “As a man of the theatre myself, I must say you don’t seem to be doing so bad for yourself.” “That’s because I’m selling virtue,” Philip responded. “Can I buy you a drink?” Phineas asked. Philip looked between the two gentlemen before getting a smile on his face. “You can buy me two…” <> Later on, the three men found themselves sharing drinks at a local tavern. “I wanna go after the carriage trade,” Phineas explained to Philip. “Present legitimate acts, expand our appeal, go after the snobs.” “If you only knew how suffocating they are.” “Believe me my young friend, I have experience with their kind,” Erik responded. “They always look down upon those they feel they are superior to. If you are not highborn or have any success, you mean nothing to them.” “Sounds about right,” Philip nodded. “So come join the circus,” Phineas offered. “Teach me how to appeal to the highbrows.” Of course, Philip looked at him as though he were speaking like a raving mad man. “Are you serious?” He asked. “Mm-hmm…” Phineas nodded. “Mr. Barnum, I can’t just run off and join the circus.” “Why not? Sounds thrilling, doesn’t it?” “Not to mention you clearly have a flare for show business,” Erik added. “Show business?” Philip spoke confused. “Never heard of it.” “That’s because we just invented it,” Erik smirked. “Let’s just say I find it much more comfortable admiring your show from afar,” Philip chuckled. “Comfort, the enemy of progress,” Phineas said, throwing back a shot. “Do you understand that just associating with you could cost me my inheritance?” “Oh, it could cost you more than that,” Phineas responded. “You’d be risking everything. But, on the other hand, well, you just might find yourself a free man.” All three men threw back another shot before they did what most men who’ve had a few too many shots do in a situation like this… sing. https://m. Philip Carlyle stood for a moment as he considered the notion going through his head. Then a big grin spread across his face as he turned right back around. Grabbing a shot of whiskey off the counter, Philip raised it up with a smile on his face. “Sir, it looks like you have yourself a junior partner,” He declared. Barnum and Erik both raised their own glasses as the bartender rang up their drinks on the cash register. “What I have is an overcompensated apprentice,” Barnum joked. “Either way, it means more money in our pockets and more attention to our cause,” Erik smiled. The three men toasted to their new partnership before throwing the shots back and slammed their glasses onto the countertop. With that in mind, the three men made their way back to Barnum and Bailey’s Circus. From the sky box high along the Circus building, Philip emerged in time to see Anne Wheeler in the midst of her trapeze act, and she rose high enough to where they locked eyes with one another. In that one instant, the rest of the world stood still and there was no one else except them in that exact moment. Then, as quick as it begun, it was over as Anne fell right back into her routine and Philip just stared after her almost in a trance. “Who is that?” He asked. “Perhaps we can introduce you,” Erik smiled. Leading the young man out of the sky box, Erik and Phineas drew him down to meet the acts. “Hey, hey!” Barnum shouted loudly. “No one’s buying hats back here. Get out front, go!” It was then Anne and W.D. came back after finishing their routine. Erik approached the pair eagerly to introduce them to Philip. “W.D., Anne, allow me to introduce our newest hire, Mr. Philip Carlyle.” “It’s a pleasure to meet you,” W.D. greeted. “Yeah, pleasure,” Philip shook his hand. “And what is your act, Mr. Carlyle?” Anne asked. “I don’t have an act.” Anne merely chuckled at that response and gave him a mischievous smirk. “Everyone’s got an act.” She walked off back to the changing room with Philip watching her every step of the way. At that moment, Mr. O’Malley ran in looking quite worried. “Mr. Barnum! Mr. Bailey!” “What is it O’Malley?” Erik asked. “You better come see this.” Erik ran off with Phineas right on his tail. Phineas called back to Philip, who was still in a trance. “Philip, keep up!” Philip turned back only to come face-to-face with a very stern W.D., who had caught him gawking after his sister. Philip merely smiled nervously before awkwardly scurrying off behind him. When he finally caught up with the circus owners, he was surprised to look out upon an angry mob with signs and torches in front of the building. By the looks of them, they were quite angry indeed. “A bit of a nasty element,” O’Malley commented. “There always is, isn’t there?” Erik asked. “Nothing draws a crowd quite like a crowd,” Phineas added. “We don’t want you in our city!” “Go home, you freaks!” “Freaks!” Erik and Barnum both looked at each other quite nervously. Clearly the crowds of hateful patrons were growing far more angrier and violent by the day. They feared that sooner or later this little spark would light the fire that would eventually end them for good. They could hope that sooner or later they’d find a way to stop it… hopefully. This is MeAuthor's Note Before we proceed with this chapter, a few things first. Number one, all the dresses for the ponies in this chapter, minus Spike, were made by my wonderful costume designer: cheerful09. Secondly, imagine Spike looking older and wearing the same outfit. Now then let's get on to the chapter shall we? This is Me The very next day, after hiring Philip Carlyle, everyone gathered at the circus after the events of the night before. Barnum and Erik had since returned to the mansion and told the others what happened. From meeting with Philip, hiring him into the show, and all ending with an encounter with an angry mob of protestors. Then, of course, the bad news only continued the moment they received the local newspaper the next day and got one look at Mr. Bennett’s latest review. Now they all sat together, listening along with the rest of the troupe as Phineas read the paper’s review. “’Shame of the city’,” Barnum read. “’The protests cement Mr. Barnum’s reputation as a purveyor of the offensive and indecent’.” “Offensive and indecent?” Lettie repeated. “Mr. Bennett, I am blushing.” “No, I’m blushing,” Helen giggled, off the side. “First some pony has the never to try and ruin ‘my’ career with bad reviews, now the same thing is happening here?” Rara spoke up. “Doesn’t anyone else find that coincidental?” “It certainly seems eerily similar in a way,” Twilight agreed. “All it shows is that no matter what world you end up in, there’s always those who want to tear down hard-working people,” Rainbow spoke. “It’s deplorable and outrageous, that’s what it is,” Erik spoke up. “What do you care what Bennett thinks?” Lettie asked. “He’s a prig.” “And a snob,” Charles finished. “Yeah, and all the snobs in New York read him,” Barnum reminded them. “He does their thinking for them.” “Whatever happened to thriving off controversy?” Charity asked. “Yeah, well—hey.” It was then Philip Carlyle came walking in to greet everyone. The moment they saw his arrival, they all smiled. “Ah our young Mr. Carlyle has graced us with his presence,” Erik said jokingly. “Do you have any thoughts on this?” “Philip!” Caroline and Helen yelled, hugging the young man. “You know what?” He replied. “As a matter of fact, I do.” He procured a folded piece of paper from his pocket, handing it to Phineas who proceeded to unfold and read the fine print. “’The Master of the Household has it in command of the Queen to invite Mr. Phineas T. Barnum and his theatrical troupe to a reception at Buckingham Palace’,” He read. Hearing what he was saying made everyone stand up in shock and begin conversing amongst each other. The Queen was inviting them all to Buckingham Palace? Surely it had to be some sick joke orchestrated by someone trying to get their hopes up. Why on Earth would the Queen invite them to a royal gathering? And at the palace? “The Queen Victoria?” Charity asked in shock. “Is this real?” “I don’t know,” Rainbow spoke suspiciously. “It sounds like a trick.” “I had to pull a few strings,” Philip nodded. “If you want society to accept you, you may as well start… at the very, very top.” “Are we all invited?” Anne asked. “I’d certainly hope so,” Applejack added. “Ah mean we all done pitched in and helped this here idea take-off.” Everyone looked at Philip expectantly to which the young man sighed before looking directly at Anne. Taking a deep breath, his decision was made. “I guess I’ll just have to tell the Queen that either all of us go… or none of us will.” This caused everyone to burst out into joyous chatter at the prospect. They were about to go to England and meet her royal highness, Queen Victoria herself. This sort of thing doesn’t happen every day, especially for circus folk. “The Queen of England!” Charles said excitedly. “Can’t get much better than that.” “This is going to be the biggest… party… EVER!!!” Pinkie yelled. She pulled her confetti cannon out of her mane and proceeded to fire it all over the room as everyone laughed and danced around in joy. In the midst of all the joy and excitement, Erik paused for a brief moment as he looked through the crowd and his eyes landed on Rara celebrating with her friends. A small smile crept across his face as he came up with another glorious idea in mind. Walking slowly toward Philip, he pulled the young man aside to speak with him privately. “I need to include something in your letter to the Queen,” He whispered. “We’re already pushing it by asking if everyone can attend,” Philip warned. “What else could we possibly ask?” “Trust me, this will be well worth it,” Erik assured. <> A few days later… The entire troupe made it all the way to England and now walked through the halls of the famous Buckingham Palace. For the longest time, England had been the largest governing power in the entire world before the United States gained its independence from British rule. But tonight was not a history lesson, tonight was all about making history. Tonight, the Barnum and Bailey Circus would be meeting with the Queen of England herself. Barnum, Philip, and Erik all dressed in their finest attire while the rest of their troupe dressed in their usual getup. Rarity, as always, created a fabulous ensemble for herself and her friends. “Honestly Rarity, I can’t stress enough how amazing you are with designing our dresses,” Twilight spoke, admiring her own. “Why thank you darling,” Rarity smiled appreciatively. “I of course always put everything I have into my work.” “Well ya certainly don’t disappoint,” Applejack replied. “Never been one fer getting’ gussied up mah self, but when ah do, ya always know how tah really make me look all fancy.” “Eh, I like it and all but the sooner I get out of this the better,” Rainbow groaned, trying to scratch her back. “These things make me itch up a storm.” “Aw come on you big party pooper!” Pinkie piped in. “Looking good from time to time never hurt any pony. Besides, if you want to have the best party ever, we must look the part!” “Why aren’t we in tails?” Philip asked Barnum. “We’re the entertainment,” Phineas replied. “Don’t exactly see you in a costume,” Lettie jested. Following behind the royal escort, he lead them into the throne room where a large number of people were already assembled around the Queen, who sat upon her throne at the end of a long red carpet. The escort bowed his head to his Queen before introducing the group. “Your Majesty, Mr. Phineas T. Barnum and his… ‘oddities’ from America!” The escort stood aside allowing the entire group to make their approach down the carpet. All around them, they could hear the chatter and murmuring from all around them. “Is that—is that real?” A woman whispered. “I cannot be certain,” A man replied. Eventually, the entire group reached the end of the red carpet and now stood directly before the young Queen Victoria. Philip made his way before the rest of the group and bowed toward the queen. “Your Majesty,” He greeted. “May I present Mr. Barnum.” “The honor is mine, Mr. Barnum,” The Queen replied curtly. “And I’ve heard all about your little colonel from my friends in America.” This caused Charles to step out from behind Barnum, dressed in his usual general outfit. “General, ma’am,” He corrected. “You’re even smaller than I imagined.” “Well, you’re not exactly reaching the top shelf yourself, sweetheart.” This caused everyone in the group to gasp in horror over the fact he just uttered such strong words to the Queen. Barnum and Erik looked horrified, as did the Equestrian group. They anxiously stood waiting to see what would happen next. They could only imagine the punishment for insulting the Queen not even a minute into meeting her. As if all of Twilight’s worst fears about letting down Celestia were slowly coming to light. But thankfully, Queen Victoria took no offense to it at all… actually, she started laughing. This caused a chain reaction from all around her, and soon everyone started laughing as well. Granted, the laughing coming from the Equestrians and the circus troupe were more awkward than everyone else, but what else could they do? “Oh, I do so love the sense of humor in your troupe,” The Queen laughed. “Well met Mr. Barnum, well met indeed.” Barnum bowed his head again before quickly leading the troupe off to the side before things could get any worse. Philip grabbed a drink for himself, Erik, and Barnum while everyone else stood off to the side. “That went well,” Barnum spoke awkwardly. “It certainly could’ve gone worse,” Erik replied. “At least we get to leave with our heads.” Philips’ head seemed a thousand miles away as he focused more on Anne off to the side. Just then, a fanfare played throughout the hall as another royal escort stood at the entrance to the throne room. “Your Majesty, Miss Jenny Lind.” The escort stepped out of the way allowing a beautiful red-haired woman to enter the throne room. She had her hair tied back in an extravagant bun and wore the most beautiful white dress ever seen. Her mere presence garnered much attention from everyone in the throne room, including Mr. Barnum. “Who’s that?” He asked Philip curiously. “The opera singer?” “Singer, huh?” “She’s the most famous performer in all of Europe,” Philip explained. “She’s sold out La Scala a dozen times. Not to mention the French Opera.” To say the least, Phineas was quite impressed with her background. So much accomplished through singing alone. It was then his brain began to spin uncontrollably with ideas. Leaning over toward Erik, he started whispering into his ear. “We need to get her to perform for us,” He spoke. “And exactly how do you propose to do that?” Erik asked. “Trust me, I can be persuasive.” “Very well…” Erik sighed, rolling his eyes. “But under ‘one’ condition.” “Of course, just name it.” “We’ll invite Miss Lind to join our troupe, IF we introduce Rara to her as well.” This caused Barnum to face his partner in confusion. “Why?” He asked. “Because in case you’ve forgotten, Rara’s a singer and my star talent,” Erik responded. “I promised her I’d help her regain her confidence in her singing back. What better way than this?” Barnum turned over his shoulder toward the group of chattering ponies and Spike, amongst them was Rara herself. He sighed to himself but realized Erik raised a strong point. “Alright, you can bring her over,” He relented. Erik nodded and approached the group to collect Rara. In the meantime, Barnum gently pushed Philip forward much to the young man’s confusion. “What are you doing?” He asked. “Following you, so you can introduce me to Miss Lind.” “Introduce you?” “Yeah.” “I don’t know her.” “Everybody knows her,” Barnum scoffed. “You just said so yourself.” “Yeah, exactly,” Philip responded. “You don’t just march up to someone like this.” “Why not? We’re personable. She’s a person.” Getting right up alongside Jenny Lind, Barnum cleared his throat to draw her attention and they both smiled when she turned to face them. “Miss Lind,” Philip greeted, bowing his head. “My name is Philip Carlyle, and this extraordinary gentleman next to me…” “Phineas Taylor Barnum,” Barnum interrupted. “The pleasure’s mine.” He grabbed her hand with his and gave said hand a kiss like a proper gentleman. At that moment, Erik walked over with Rara at his side as well as the rest of the Mane Six and Spike. They all bowed their heads in respect, as Erik shook her hand. “Miss Lind, it is a pleasure to make your acquaintance,” Erik greeted. “I am James Anthony Bailey, co-owner of the Barnum and Bailey Circus.” “A great pleasure Mr. Bailey,” Jenny smiled. “I have someone I’d love for you to meet if you would madame. She’s the best singer under my employment currently going through much criticism. I figured meeting you might help boost her confidence.” The group looked down as Rara walked alongside Erik and bowed her head. “It’s very nice to meet you Miss Lind,” She greeted kindly. “I am Countess Coloratura of Equestria, but my friends call me Rara.” “And let me tall ya ma’am, she’s got some set ah pipes on her she does,” Applejack added. Jenny chuckled in amusement as she looked down toward the little mare and her friends. “It is quite nice to meet you as well Miss Coloratura,” Jenny bowed. She soon turned back toward Mr. Barnum. “Of course, you are the American,” Jenny responded. “I believe I might have heard of you.” “Oh, well, if you’ve heard of me all the way over here, I must be doing something right.” “That, or something very wrong,” Jenny retorted. “Well, in the world of publicity, there’s hardly a difference,” Barnum returned. “I believe those are the words of a scoundrel, Mr. Barnum.” “A showman, Miss Lind, just a showman. The best on my side of the Atlantic.” “Well, if you do say so yourself.” “I do, but I don’t have to.” “Oh no, Miss Lind,” Twilight interrupted. “He’s one of the very best.” “Very kind of you,” Barnum replied, brushing her off. Twilight was a slight taken aback by that. A bit rude of Phineas to just brush her aside as though what she said didn’t matter. “Miss Lind… let me get to the point,” Barnum proposed. “I’d like to bring you to New York. And if you agree, I’ll make you the most famous singer not in Europe, but in the entire world.” Jenny squinted her eyes at him for a moment before getting a slight smirk on her face. “And have you heard me sing?” She asked. “Absolutely!” Philip nodded. “No,” Phineas shook his head. “No, I haven’t. But like mine, your reputation precedes you, and, well, I trust your reputation more than my own taste, so…” “I’ve never been to America,” Jenny argued. “You will sing in the grandest theater with the finest orchestra in the greatest city on Earth,” Barnum assured her. “’Jenny Lind, one night only’.” To which received a chuckle out of both of them. “Or maybe two. And at 20 percent at the gate, it’ll be a queen’s ransom for your efforts.” “I give most of my earnings to charity, Mr. Barnum,” Jenny retorted. “To orphans and widows.” “Voice of a Nightingale, Heart of an Angel,” Philip spoke, with admiration. “Certainly an act to follow,” Erik added. “That’s brilliant!” Barnum agreed. “I mean the press will go crazy for that story.” “That’s not a story,” Jenny denied. “May I ask you something, Mr. Barnum?” “Anything.” “Why me?” She asked seriously. “People come to my show for the pleasure of being hoodwinked,” Barnum responded. “Just once, I’d love to give them something real.” Jenny once again squinted at him, thinking long and hard about his offer. It was certainly a very tempting one that she’d be foolish to turn down. “I think we might be able to accommodate that Mr. Barnum,” She nodded. “Fantastic!” Barnum said with glee. “… On one condition.” “What might that be?” Barnum raised a brow curiously. “Only if she performs as well,” She addressed Rara. “ME?!” Rara exclaimed in shock. “Indeed,” Jenny nodded. “If you are truly as good as your manager says, I would love to see you perform.” “Miss Lind.” The sound of a man’s voice drew Jenny to a group gesturing her to join them. With that in mind, Jenny Lind walked off to join the group leaving everyone standing there in shock. The one most shocked for certain was Rara. She’d just been asked to sing in front of a human audience… in New York… and to open for Jenny Lind. Oh boy… <> A few weeks later… Everyone safely made it back to New York City after a rather eventful trip. After Jenny agreed to perform in New York, Phineas worked tirelessly to make it happen. He rented out the biggest opera house in the city and prepared all the arrangements to get Jenny to New York. Now the night had come to perform, with the Barnum family all standing outside the opera house as many patrons made their way inside. “Everyone is here,” Barnum said excitedly. “Look at this. Even the Winthrops.” “Are you happy?” Charity asked. “I will be if this works,” Phineas responded nervously. “Oh, God. I hope she can sing.” Meanwhile, inside the opera house, tensions were at an all-time high for Rara. Naturally she’d done this many times in her life and yet this was the most nervous she’d ever been before a show. So many thoughts circulated in her mind over this very moment. Was she going to be terrible? Did she even deserve to go up and perform? All this rushed through her head as Rarity put the finishing touches on her outfit for the performance. “Now don’t ya’’ worry none Rara,” Applejack assured. “Yer gonna do great tonight same as ya always do.” “Not to mention we’ll be out there cheering for you all the way,” Fluttershy added. “Girls I… I just don’t know,” Rara sighed dejected. “No need to worry darling,” Rarity assured. “You’ve done this countless times before. Just imagine this as those other concerts.” “But the reviews…” “Those reviews came from non-believes in ‘Equestria’, not here,” Twilight spoke up. “In this world, you’re a blank slate.” “Exactly!” Spike nodded. “You just go out there tonight and shine as you always do. I’ve no doubt in my mind they’ll want more.” Rara released a deep breath as the kind words from her friends sunk in. “I really appreciate you guys for saying so, and for being here for me,” She smiled appreciatively. “I’d like a few moments by myself, please.” “No problem Ra,” Rainbow assured. “Just remember: No matter what happens tonight, we’re still here for you. Right guys?” “Right!” Every pony nodded in unison. Soon the whole group left the backstage area and made their way into the theatre. It was at that moment P.T. Barnum walked backstage to prepare for the show. He spotted Rara, the mare sitting alone holding a newspaper. Judging by the look upon her face, she seemed worried… more so than usual. Concerned, Barnum approached the mare and sat beside her as if trying to figure out what was up with her. “Worried about the show?” He asked. “I am…” Rara replied. “Actually… more than that.” “How so?” In response, Rara showed Barnum the review on the newspaper. Numerous statements were on the page including, ‘Her voice isn’t good enough!’ and ‘Why would any pony want to see her on stage with a voice like that?’. Things no person nor pony ever want to hear. “I know it’s just words on paper, but every time I see them I fear my career is over. Like some pony is writing my death sentence.” Soon as Rara finished speaking, she felt an arm wrap around her body. She turned her head and before her eyes she saw Barnum looking toward the ceiling. As if he was looking past the roof and gazing toward the sky. “Rara, I think you’ve been going about this the wrong way,” Barnum spoke. “What do you mean?” Rara asked. “When I’m working on the show, I don’t think of what the reviews are going to say. I think only of how that crowd will cheer when they see it and how it will be the best day of their lives. I know you’ll give out the performance of a lifetime… now you must ‘believe’ you can.” Hearing Barnum’s words made Rara feel slightly better. One man having so much faith in her, despite her uncertainty of what the future held or if her career would be ruined or not. But one thing she knew for certain was that if this were to be her final performance, she intended to go out with a bang. “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She smiled. “You’re welcome,” He spoke quickly. “Now I really need to find our other star tonight.” Quickly making his way to the side of the stage, he looked out toward the gathering ensemble of the elite and the orchestra preparing just as Philip and Erik came up from behind. “What’s taking her so long?” Phineas asked nervously. “They’re still taking their seats,” Philip assured. ‘Speaking of which…” “Yeah?” “Tom and Lettie, the others, they’ve just arrived.” “What?” Barnum asked shocked. “I have reserved Box Five for the show,” Erik spoke up. “Shall I have them put there?” “That box? No, no, no, that’s a bit visible.” “Visible?” Philip asked confused. “The acoustics are actually better in the standing room,” Phineas replied. “That’s where they should be.” “Miss Lind’s ready now,” A stagehand informed. “Okay. Thank you, thank God!” He quickly walked off downstage leaving a very confused Erik and Philip behind. “Why would he have a problem with his own troupe being seen?” Philip asked Erik. “I’m not sure,” Erik shrugged. “Somehow I suspect Mr. Barnum is changing… and certainly not for the better.” “What do you mean?” “My friend, I fear we shall soon find out.” <> The Mane Six and Spike made their way towards their private box in the opera house when they noticed something very odd. The entire circus troupe stood at the back of the theatre near the doors. This confused them because they were expected to be at the box waiting for them. They approached the troupe to inquire just what the deal was. “Why are you guys sitting way back here?” Pinkie asked. “We have reservations at Box Five where we can ‘really’ get the party started.” “We were asked to stay back here,” Charles told them. “Stay back here?” Applejack questioned. “By whom?” Before anyone could answer, Mr. Barnum pushed his way out from behind the curtain and stared out amongst the gathered audience. “Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for your patience,” He addressed. Looking toward the crowd, he could clearly hear the majority of their comments. “He’s out of his element.” “What is this about?” “Is that Barnum?” “This isn’t the circus.” Barnum just brushed the comments to the back of his mind and proceeded. “I recently had the privilege of hearing the most divine voice I’ve ever heard,” He continued. “Now I know that sounds like Barnum humbug… but I have a hundred bottles of good champagne on ice that says this isn’t just another sideshow novelty. But first, before we begin, let us start with a little preshow. Ladies and gentlemen, give it up for the one… and indeed the only… Countess Coloratura!” Everyone in the audience clapped as the curtains slowly unveiled to reveal Rara standing on stage looking relatively frightened. The moment everyone saw the pony on stage, the audience began to murmur in confusion. This did nothing to help with her anxiety one bit. Then she glanced toward the back of the theatre, taking note of the troupe and all her friends smiling at her. Turning toward the side she saw Erik, Philip, and Barnum smiling as well. Seeing them show their encouragement made a smile spread across Rara’s face as she took a deep breath and stared back toward the audience. And then… she sang. *Stop at 2:55* Soon as Rara finished the song, a long momentary pause took place as the audience just sat there staring at her with wide eyes. No one spoke, no one made any noise, no one even moved. Rara got that horrible feeling inside and instantly she believed they ‘hated’ it, that they hated her. A lone tear made its way down her cheek, as she bowed her head in shame before making her way off stage. And then… it happened. The crowd erupted into cheers, clapping as they stood on their feet and gave her a standing ovation. Rara turned back in surprise before a smile found its way to her face once more. Looking back, she could see the entire troupe clapping as well along with all her friends cheering. “Way to go Rara!” “That’s mah friend!” “You’re amazing!” Rara took a moment to soak it all in, giving the crowd a few more bows before making her way off stage. For the first time in a long while, Rara truly felt… amazing. Barnum made his way back onstage and he too clapped for Rara. “My wasn’t that just an amazing opening performance?” He addressed the crowd. “And now ladies and gentlemen, the moment you have all been waiting for. May I present… the Swedish Nightingale… Miss Jenny Lind!” Once again, the crowd clapped as the curtains opened once more revealing Jenny Lind in a beautiful dress of her own as she stared out toward the crowd. The orchestra started up once more and Jenny Lind sang out in a beautiful voice. Once again, the audience erupts into cheers and applause as they began yelling out words of congratulations toward the fabulous opera singer. “Brava!” “Brava!” “More!” “Wonderful!” “Bravissima!” “More!” “Excellent!” “Encore!” The whole time this went on, Barnum looked out in amazement at the cheering audience. Never before had he ever had such a large number of people of such high class cheering for a show that he had orchestrated. And somewhere, deep within that crowd, Mr. Bennett the critic slowly stood up from his chair… and he actually applauded. Everyone was impressed with Lind’s performance, even the Equestrians and the whole circus troupe… well, almost all of them. <> A short white later, a massive party was underway in celebration of a magnificent show. Champagne popped as everyone mingled, laughed, and all together had a good time. Rara was at the party as well, surrounded by millions of different people and answering all their questions. For her, it really felt good to have this kind of recognition again. Over on the other side of the room, Barnum was introducing Jenny to his family. “Jenny, this is my wife, Charity, and our girls,” He introduced. “Of course, and I’ve heard so much about you!” Jenny smiled, looking at Caroline. “And your father tells me you’re a fan of ballet.” “Yes, I’m ‘studying’ ballet,” Caroline replied. “Are you?” “Of course, I am.” “And, of course, she is,” Phineas added, chuckling. “And what about you, Helen?” “You look like a princess, ma’am,” Helen responded. This caused everyone in the group to laugh in humor, just as Rara came alongside the rest of the group and they all looked at her. “Ah, here’s the other half of the amazing performance tonight,” Barnum smiled. “Well done tonight Coloratura.” “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She thanked him. “It felt amazing to finally get back on the stage and be appreciated once more.” “Well, you certainly deserved it,” Jenny smiled. “I suppose your manager was right about you after all. Such an amazing talent you hold in you.” “Speaking on which, where’s Mr. Bailey?” Phineas asked. “Oh he had to go and check on Rarity and the others. But he should be back soon.” Looking past them, Barnum saw none other than Mr. Bennet from the newspaper walking by. “If you all will excuse me for a moment,” He said. He left the group to continue their conversation as he walked right over to Mr. Bennett to speak with him. “Mr. Bennett,” He greeted. “How kind of you to attend tonight.” “I have to admit, Barnum… she is remarkable,” Bennett complimented. “Enough to bring joy to the most joyless critic, isn’t she?” Barnum mocked. Bennett kept a smooth composure despite having clearly just been insulted. “Mm… and in the hands of a real purveyor of the arts,” Bennett shot back. “She could be something in this country. Shame she’s fallen in with you.” “You really are better on the page, Mr. Bennett, hard as that is to believe,” Barnum finished before walking off. As he continued walking throughout the room, a few patrons approached him and greeted him with adoration. “Mr. Barnum, I’d love to met Miss Lind,” One woman said. “And you will meet Miss Lind,” Phineas replied. “Would you introduce us?” “If you just give me a moment—” “Phineas.” The sound of a very familiar voice that he really hoped he would never have to hear again instantly took much of the joy out of Barnum. He turned around and came face-to-face with Mr. and Mrs. Hallet. He had not seen Charity’s parents ever since she had left so they could start their life together and he was not at all pleased to see them even now. “Yes,” He spoke civilly. “You’ve… done well,” Mr. Hallet complimented. “Thank you.” He then decided he wanted to milk that finally, for once in his life, Charity’s parents finally saw how successful he really was. And just how wrong they had been about him for years. “Allow me to introduce you,” He smiled. He lead them promptly over to Jenny Lind herself. “Uh, excuse me, Jenny,” Phineas spoke. “I’d like you to meet Charity’s parents, Mr. and Mrs. Hallet.” “Ah, pleasure,” Jenny greeted. At that moment, Charity looked over from where she was across the room and noticed her parents. Already she knew that if she didn’t step in, this would surely go badly. “How do you do?” Mrs. Hallet greeted. “Very nice to meet you.” “Good to meet you,” Mr. Hallet added. “Mother.” Mr. and Mrs. Hallet both turned over and saw their daughter approaching along with their grandchildren who they had never met until this very moment. “Hello, dear,” Mrs. Hallet said happily. “Are these—” “Yes, yes, those are your granddaughters,” Phineas interrupted. “Phineas, not here!” Charity warned. “Not here?” Phineas replied in false confusion. “You afraid I’m gonna embarrass your parents in front of their fancy friends? I—I really don’t think I have that power.” The whole time he spoke, he was looking directly at Mr. Hallet with a look of near disdain and superiority in his face. “An insignificant man like me who was clearly destined to lead an insignificant life.” “All that fortune, and still just the tailor’s boy,” Mr. Hallet replied. “Get out,” Phineas spoke lowly. And just like that, Mr. Hallet gave one last glance at Phineas before grabbing his wife and walked out f the room. Phineas looked over and noticed the upset look on his wife’s face. “Well, Phineas… I believe I told you that free champagne is a recipe for disaster,” Jenny joked. Clearly Charity officially had enough of the night. She grabbed the girls and quickly made her way out of the room. “Charity!” Phineas called after her. “Now would everyone please raise their glasses?” Jenny announced. “To Mr. Barnum, who has shown once and for all that a man’s station is limited only by his imagination.” “To Barnum!” Everyone cheered. “Thank you,” He replied. “To Mr. Barnum,” Jenny added. “Thank you. It’s hard to understand wealth and privilege when you’re born into it. Phineas merely chuckled at that statement as Jenny leaned in to tell him something she never told anyone else before. “I sometimes don’t feel like I belong here,” She whispered. “You?” He asked surprise. “I was born out of wedlock… and that brought shame upon my family,” Jenny confessed. “And life always manages to remind me that I don’t deserve a place in this world. And that… leaves a hole that no ovation can ever fill.” Just then, the sound of boisterous laughing drew everyone’s attention to the door. Phineas quickly walked forward, knowing full well who it was. He made it to the door just in time to see his troupe and the Equestrians arriving. “Mr. Phineas!” Lettie said happily. “Lord, that lady can sing!” “Not to mention Rara just blowin’ everyone’s minds!” Applejack laughed. “Ah knew she’d be alright.” “I know,” Barnum responded quickly. “Think she likes a man in uniform?” Charles asked with a smirk. “I’m sure she does. Okay, what are you doing here? You got a show in an hour, okay?” “That’s enough time for us to have at least three drinks, right?” Rainbow asked. “It’s not a party until Pinkie Pie gets there,” Pinkie giggled with glee. “Plus, we came to congratulate Rara on a job well done,” Twilight added. “Come on, let’s go!” Spike ushered. Everyone and every pony made to walk inside, but Barnum blocked the way and nearly pushed them back out. “No, no, no. Lettie!” “What?” Lettie asked confused. “It’s very crowded in here, okay?” Barnum spoke. “And I can’t have you mingling--guys!” Once more they tried to make it through the doors. But Barnum pushed them back harder. “Who’s gonna pay admission if you’re out there for all the world to see?” “Now hold up a minute,” Applejack spoke up. “Ah ain’t goin’ nowhere till I see mah friend and congratulate her.” “It’s only polite if we do darling,” Rarity added. “Yes, that’s it!” Fluttershy nodded. “A.J.?” Everyone looked past Barnum, spotting Rara peeking out from the door. “There ya are, Rara!” Applejack smiled. “Ah gotta say ah was mighty impressed with…” “Yeah that’s great A.J.,” Rara interrupted quickly. “But I really need to get back inside. I have a lot of people wanting to talk to me.” “That’s no problem darling,” Rarity assured. “We’re merely here to give our congratulations and then we’ll be on our way—” “Sorry guys, I really don’t have time to talk tonight,” Rara shook her head. “Everyone’s talking about how Countess Coloratura is the best they’ve heard, and this is my one chance to make a good impression on this world.” “But Rara…” Applejack spoke up. “Okay? Have a great show!” Barnum finished quickly. “Mr. Barnum, wait!” Fluttershy called out. But it was too late. Barnum quickly slammed the door shut on everyone’s face. And there they stood, completely in shock. But none more surprised than the ponies and Spike. To say that they were beyond confused is the biggest understatement of the century. “What the hay just happened?” Rainbow asked. “That… is precisely what I feared.” Everyone turned toward the side and found Erik standing in the corner, a look of disappointment on his face. “What do you mean Erik?” Twilight asked. “I’ve been watching very closely for a while and I’ve noticed that Phineas hasn’t been ‘happy’ with being only the ‘Circus King’,” Erik explained. “Philip and I tried to talk him down, but he insists he needed more. Then when we went to London and met with Miss Lind for the first time, I believe greed has taken over.” “You mean…” Spike began. “I’m afraid so young Spike,” Erik nodded. “He’s no longer pleased with the circus and wishes to focus solely on Jenny Lind.” This assumption was only confirmed the moment they heard the chiming of a glass and heard Barnum’s muffled voice from the other side of the door. “Ladies and gentlemen, a toast!” Barnum announced muffled. “Jenny, America may not know it yet… but they are going to love you.” Hearing those words made the entire troupe feel extremely betrayed and saddened. The exact same thing Barnum used to say to them when they started the circus together. Words from a man who once gave them a place where they felt was home, a chance to be more than what they’ve always been. Except now… he just tossed them aside like yesterday’s newspaper, the same way the rest of the world had for years. Lettie released a sob, as her emotions took over and she started to sing. And regardless of what the world has to say of them all, no matter what choice words they utter or what gestures they make in a threatening manner, nothing will change what the troupe or the Equestrians are. They may appear to be weird to everyone else, most of them are not of high standards, and they don’t think the way as these people do. But they are more than just a sideshow carnival act. They are individuals, they have feelings, and all they ever wanted are the same thing that everyone strives for: Respect… and dignity. For they know what they are, they are ’proud’ of what they are, and nothing was going to change their minds. A Change in BehaviorThe next day, following the amazing performances by Jenny Lind and Rara, needless to say things were not going smoothly for Barnum and Bailey Circus. Phineas was so engaged with setting up Miss Lind’s next performance he was completely ignoring his duties as co-owner of the circus. Whenever matters came up regarding future shows, he’d always shove them on Erik and Philip while he kept his focus on climbing the social ladder in New York. And then it only got even worse from there… Phineas had announced he was going on tour around the country to manage Jenny as she performed. To say both Philip and Erik were none too pleased to hear the news would’ve been a major understatement. Hence why they found themselves trying to talk to Barnum about it, as the next show was being set up and Barnum unfurled a large promotional poster for Jenny Lind on his desk. “Why can’t you just put more shows in New York?” Philip asked him. “Why do you need to tour the country?” “Why did Napoleon march on Russia?” Phineas retorted. “I’d like to point out that Napoleon was ‘defeated’ in that invasion,” Erik reminded his partner. “Napoleon didn’t have a 60-piece orchestra.” “A 60-piece orchestra?” “Just get the cheapest musicians you can and watch that.” “We’ll still have to board them,” Erik reminded Phineas. “It’s not as simple as you make it out to be.” “We’ll get married ones,” Phineas suggested. “They can share a bunk.” Just before leaving the office, Phineas turned back and noticed O’Malley messing with his daughter’s piggy bank. “O’Malley, that’s Caroline’s piggy bank,” He reminded, as they left. Out in the main performance ring, many of the troupe were rehearsing for their acts that night. Fluttershy’s main job was working with the animals of the show. Currently, she was trying to calm an upset elephant who refused to eat. She tried to gently encourage him to eat, but the gentle giant simply refused. “Aw, come on now Titan,” She encouraged kindly. “We got you some nice quality hay and grass. I promise you’ll love it.” Titan the elephant just waved his trunk around and knocked the cart of hay and grass off to the side much to the Pegasus’s surprise. “What’s wrong big guy?” Fluttershy asked. “You’ve been like this for days; it’s not healthy for you. Just tell me how to make it better for you and I will. I promise.” Titan just moved his giant head toward the direction of the upper walkway. It was then Fluttershy noticed Barnum, Erik, and Philip continuing on with their conversation. “Custom sets?” Philip questioned. “Yeah,” Phineas nodded. “Fireworks?” Erik continued. “Uh-huh.” “Inside theaters?” “That’s genius!” Barnum smiled. “No. Hey, P.T.!” Philip called after Phineas. “These are the most famous theaters in the country. They make you buy the seats in advance just to book them—” “Yeah, I took out a loan,” Phineas interrupted. “Not to mention we’d have to pay Miss Lind in advance,” Erik added. “She’s certainly not cheap to book—” “It was a large loan, okay?” Phineas interrupted again. “My point is you won’t see a penny of profit until your 40th show…” “41st, actually.” “Do you ever listen to yourself?” Erik argued. “You’re risking everything we’ve built here!” “How do you think we built it?” Phineas asked. “We took risks and it paid off. We’ll have plenty of profits to go around after this.” Philip finally had enough with all this nonsense. He grasped Barnum by his shoulder, and forced him to face him. “P.T.?” “What?” “Your attention has been divided long enough.” “He’s absolutely right,” Erik agreed. “Our gate is down, and we have more protestors every day. Yet all you seem to care about anymore is how high you can rise on the social ladder instead of how you got there to begin with.” “You just need to get people to come back,” Phineas shrugged. “If you haven’t been to the Barnum Museum lately, you haven’t been at the Barnum Museum.” “In case you forgot, it is as much my museum as it is your!” Erik shot back. “Barnum and Bailey, just as we agreed! I put up my own business in order to help you and your family out of financial disaster! I’m the one putting all of my plans aside to cover for you.” “They come to see you,” Philip reminded Barnum. “Your crazy ideas… your new acts, the unusual.” “Well, then how about you show them a smile?” Phineas shot back. “That’d be unusual. Keep rehearsing. Just make it very clear I expect them to afford you all the deference you deserve and that they should be nice to you anyway.” And just like that, Phineas made his way through the backstage area and out the back door. This left Erik and Philip looking after him in disappointment and the rest of his troupe looking hurt and angry. “Ain’t that a sight for sore eyes?” Lettie commented. “Couldn’t even say ‘hello’,” Charlies added, shaking his head. “Or ‘goodbye’,” Philip sighed. “He’s going on tour. Sorry, guys.” “Oh, pull yourself together, Carlyle,” Lettie rolled her eyes. “Don’t you have somewhere to be?” Philip grabbed his pocket watch from his pocket and looked down at the time. He realized he was running very late. Erik placed a hand upon his shoulder and the young man looked up toward the smirking gaze of the Phantom himself. “Best not keep young Miss Wheeler waiting,” He chuckled. “Go on and have a good time. I’ll take care of things for tonight.” “Are you sure?” Philip asked. “I was pulling the strings of the theatre arts long before you were born,” Erik replied. “I can handle the show. Now go… give her the best night of her life. And make every moment count.” Philip nodded with a smile and raced off to meet with Anne. Erik knew that a thing was going on between Philip and Anne Wheeler, especially from what his pony friends mentioned (Mostly Rarity). There was a spark between those two, yet they barely seemed to push it any further due to whatever reluctance weighed upon the boy. Erik could only hope this night would turn out well for them and lead to something more. Everyone else watched after him, while Charles chuckled over his departure. “That boy has got the love disease for Anne bad,” He chuckled. “That he does,” Erik nodded in agreement. “But we cannot focus on his business. His affairs are his own after all. Let’s focus on tonight’s show.” “What’s the point, Mr. Bailey?” Lettie sighed. “Without Mr. Barnum, there isn’t a point in any of this.” “Surely you can’t believe that.” “It’s the truth,” Charles added. “None of us would even be here if it wasn’t for him. We’d still be going about life being kicked around and laughed at. We’re all just a bunch of freaks and monsters.” At that moment, Fluttershy made her way backstage toward the others. She overhead them talking in between comforting Titan and hearing them say such talk hurt her heart. “That isn’t true,” Fluttershy told them. “You are all wonderful human beings just like everyone else. Sure you may not look like other people, but that doesn’t mean you should feel less than others.” Despite her kind words, Lettie and Charles just looked down sadly. “It’s nice of you to say Fluttershy,” Lettie thanked her. “Sadly, the rest of the world doesn’t think the way you and your friends do. There will always be people reminding us of who we really are. A bunch of abominations with no place in this world.” Seeing her friends so dejected and somber made Fluttershy want to cry. Instead, she retained her composure and was determined to prove to these poor people how much they should be treated the same way as she wanted to be… an equal. “You know… in the land I come from, ponies used to treat ‘me’ like an outcast,” Fluttershy admitted. “And for the longest time, I didn’t feel like I belong anywhere.” “You?” Lettie questioned. “When I was a filly, back when I lived in Cloudsdale, I attended flight school like my fellow Pegasi,” Fluttershy explained. “They bullied me often, poking fun at me just because I couldn’t fly as good as all the other ponies my age. Sometimes… I wonder ‘why’ I was even born a Pegasus, that maybe I should’ve been born an Earth pony. Had it not been for Rainbow Dash sticking up for me, being my only friend, I wouldn’t know where to be. She may be hard on me at times, but she was the one friend who treated me as ‘no’ different compared to any other Pegasus… or any pony for that matter.” “What’s your point, kid?” Charles retorted. “My point is… you only believe what you are because for the longest time, you haven’t had anyone tell you any different,” Fluttershy replied. “I believe all you really needed is what I needed all those years ago. What all us outcasts need.” “And what would that be?” Charles asked somberly. “A friend,” Fluttershy smiled. Both Charles and Lettie looked up toward the timid yellow Pegasus, who just smiled brightly and offered a hoof to each of them. They both looked at her for a moment of confusion before slowly reaching out and taking a hoof each. Fluttershy helped them stand before she broke out into song, one she hoped would inspire the troupe. Soon as she finished, both Lettie and Charles gazed upon her with big smiles on their faces and held back tears threatening to emerge. Never before had they ever had anyone in their lives so willing to be their friend, a friend willing to help them through their problems. They embraced the young Pegasus in a hug to which she happily returned. From the sidelines, Erik looked on with a happy look on his face. Barnum may have given up on the circus game, but not Erik and he never would. And without question, his friends clearly won’t give up on these people… not ever. <> Later that evening, Anne Wheeler, dressed in her finest ensemble, walked into the New York Opera House to see the latest show. All her life she wanted to go to the theatre and now here she was finally in a position she was able to do so. Mr. Barnum apparently left a ticket just for her and so she approached the ticket booth to collect it. “Mr. Barnum said he left a ticket for me,” She spoke to the attendant. The attendant reached down and pulled it out. To her surprise, the man proceeded to hand her not one, but two tickets. This most certainly confused Anne greatly. “I’m—I’m sorry,” She spoke confused. “I—I believe there’s only supposed to be one.” “No, there’s meant to be two.” The sudden voice beside her made her turn her head and see Philip Carlyle standing right next to her dressed in a fancy suit. The two stood there for a moment as they gazed at each other. They had not seen much of one another since the night of Jenny Lind’s performance, and they remembered that moment very well. In the midst of Lind’s song, Philip reached over and intertwined his hand with hers. In that one moment, Anne felt happier than she had ever felt in her entire life. Sadly, the moment was spoiled when they both noticed Philip’s parents in the audience looking at them funny. Philip quickly released his grip on her hand, which made Anne feel so foolish, so upset that she walked out of the hall. And now here they stood, face-to-face once more as if by chance… or destiny. “I wasn’t sure you’d come if I asked,” Philip said awkwardly. “Five minutes to curtain,” A man announced. Philip offered his arm to Anne, who accepted after a moment’s hesitation. He proceeded to lead her towards the entrance to the theatre where a wonderful show waited for them. “I’ve always wanted to go to the theater,” Anne told him. They both smiled at each other as they made their way up the steps. Then suddenly, they found their path blocked by none other than Mr. and Mrs. Carlyle, Philip’s parents. Both Anne and Philip looked toward them awkwardly. “Philip, is that you?” Mr. Carlyle asked. “Mother… father…” Philip nodded to them. “This is Anne Wheeler.” “Philip… have you no shame?” Mr. Carlyle asked appalled. “Associating myself with that Barnum business is one thing… but parading around with the help?” Hearing him say such a remark made Anne suddenly feel very out of place. She quickly turned heel and started making her way out of the building. “Anne!” Philip called after her. “Anne! Anne!” She gave no reply nor even looked back. She just walked out the front door as Philip looked on. The moment he turned to look at his father, anger drew upon the young man’s face. “How dare you speak to her like that?” He asked lowly. Philip started to follow her, only for his mother to hold out her arm to stop him. “You forget your place, Philip,” She said. “My place?” Philip asked. “Mother, if this is my place then I don’t want any part of it.” And that said, Philip pushed past his parents not once looking back. All he did was kept going and followed Anne out the front door determined to find her again. <> As it turned out, Anne hadn’t gone as far as Philip thought. She had made her way back to the circus building, where Philip followed her the entire way. The moment he entered the building, he found Anne in her costume sitting on the bleachers and he walked toward her. “Anne,” He spoke gently. “They’re small-minded people. Why do you care what they think?” “It’s not just them,” Anne responded, trying not to cry. “You’ve never had somebody look at you the way your parents looked at me. The way everyone would look at us.” Anne made to walk away, but Philip quickly turned on heel to face her once again as his true feelings for her came out in song form. Soon as the singing was over, Anne placed a single hand upon Philip’s cheek before she walked off. Philip found himself standing there, feeling hurt for two reasons. The fact that despite being willing to give up ‘everything’ for her, Anne seemingly didn’t want to be with him. But worse than that… he was angry at the world and its people for not accepting the idea of them being together. Circus business was not all smiles and laughs as he originally thought it was. And from the shadows, hidden in the dark, Erik had been watching the pair the entire time. He too was angry… only he was more sympathetic for the young man. In a way, Philip reminded Erik of himself… the way he had initially loved someone, but they could never be together. And that was long before he met ‘the one’, a very special pony, one he happily married and would soon share a child with… everything was working out for him. But for Philip and Anne… Erik knew it would take some form of magic to make their union a reality. <> Meanwhile, across town, things were truly falling apart at the Barnum mansion. Shortly after informing is family he’d be going on tour to manage Jenny, Charity made it very clear she was certainly not pleased. It wasn’t so much he would be traveling with Jenny that bothered her; rather, it was the fact he was willing to leave his wife and kids for such a long time. Charity was already content with the life she and Phineas had together with their family, but it still seemed that it wasn’t enough for him, and he always wanted ‘more’. Barnum was currently packing for the journey while his wife tried to reason with him. “First, it was buying a house on the same street as my parents,” Charity spoke upset. “Then, meeting the Queen. Then bringing Jenny Lind, then my father the other night. When will it ever be enough for you?” “I’m doing this for Caroline and Helen,” Phineas responded. “Look around you,” Charity gestured. “They have everything.” “You don’t understand.” “I do understand.” “No, you don’t understand,” Phineas responded loudly. “How could you? My father was treated like dirt. I was treated like dirt… and my children will not be.” “You don’t need everyone to love you, Phin,” Charity assured. “Just a few good people.” “I know that…” He sighed. No matter what Charity said, no matter how hard she tried, she found it impossible to make her own husband realize they didn’t need a life of luxury and wealth to be happy. All they needed was each other, that’s more than anyone ever needed. Phineas seemed to be the only one who didn’t seem to realize that. But of course, they weren’t the ‘only’ ones dealing with this problem. In another part of the mansion, Rara packed away a few essentials as ell for she too would be accompanying Phineas and Jenny on tour. After seeing her first performance on stage, the people demanded for more appearances of the magnificent pony with the voice of an angel. And soon… word of her performance reached out to nearly every country around the world begging her to perform there. It really made Rara feel good to feel wanted by the public again, to feel like that shining star she once used to be. Her friends, on the other hoof, had a different view on the matter. “What do ya mean yer leavin’?” Applejack asked, in shock. “I mean exactly what I said,” Rara responded. “Mr. Barnum wants me to open for Miss Lind every night during our tour of the country. This is an amazing opportunity for me.” “Yeah… for six months,” Rainbow emphasized. “I know it’s a lot, but it’s worth getting back to what I used to be.” “Darling, I more than any pony understand wanting your artistry to be adored by the millions,” Rarity sympathized. “But you’re talking about leaving everyone you know and love behind for Celestia knows how long.” “Now I love going on super-duper fun adventures with my friends a heap of a lot like the next pony,” Pinkie added. “But I can’t ever imagine leaving my friends, my family, or even Cheesy and Lil’ Cheese behind for so long like that.” Rara had just finished packing her stuff and released a deep sigh. She turned around to look the others straight in the eye. “Look guys, with all due respect, you don’t understand what I’m going through,” Rara told them. “You’re the Elements of Harmony, practically Equestria’s superheroes! Your legacy is literally built in stone, and even when you retire from all this for good, you’ll still be regarded as heroes for thousands of years! “Me… I don’t have that luxury. If I can’t be a singer, I’ve got nothing to live for. No pony or creature will look at me the same way ever again. I’ve strived to be the best for so long and I’m notabout to pass up an opportunity like this. I just… can’t.” Applejack squinted her eyes as her faced garnered a more upset look. “Is that Rara talkin’… or Countess Coloratura?” “What’re you talking about?” She asked, shocked and confused. “Yer actin’ just like how ya used to when Svengallop was yer manager!” Applejack responded. “Always worryin’ more ‘bout what other ponies think of ya more than what youthink of ya.” “It’s not the same!” Rara responded, greatly upset. “Back then, I made music that meant nothing more for me but glitz and glam. Here I am making music that actually ‘means’ something to me. All I want is for everyone to enjoy it. If you were truly my friend, you’d understand that.” This caused every pony to gasp loudly over her choice of words. Applejack was especially shocked that her own friend would even say such a thing. From day one, she was Rara’s number one supporter of living her music dream ever since they were fillies in summer camp. She helped her realize she just needed to be herself and everywhere she’d go folks would love her for who she was. Now Rara was twisting all of that into this brand new image of wanting to please others, and for what? For false glory… Applejack stared right at Rara’s face, frowning heavily. “Yer right,” She spoke. “Ah don’t understand it. Guess that means we ain’t friends.” Applejack quickly turned back around and made her way out of the room, slamming the door behind her. Every pony else and Spike stood in silence for a few moments before they slowly followed Applejack out the door. Soon Rara was left standing alone, a single tear falling down her face which she quickly wiped away and grabbed her luggage. She made her way down to the main hall where Barnum was waiting with his own luggage. “You ready to be a star?” He asked her. “As ready as I’ll ever be, Mr. Barnum,” She responded. The two departed the mansion and made their way down the steps where the carriage was already waiting in the road. Barnum held the door open for Rara and she jumped into her seat opposite of Jenny Lind. Barnum hopped in behind her as Charity, the girls, and the Equestrians came out to watch them leave. “Ah can’t believe she’s actually goin’ through with this,” Applejack sighed sadly. “Ah guess the Rara ah knew really is gone…” “I could say the same about Phineas,” Charity added solemnly. “No, no! Daddy!” Caroline cried out. “Daddy!” Helen cried. It broke the Equestrians hearts watching the pair race down the steps toward the carriage, as Barnum shut the door and signaled the driver to go. The carriage pulled off down the street as Caroline and Helen raced after it. Charity, the ponies, and Spike did nothing to stop them, they just stared sadly after them. Soon Charity began to sing a sad song for the loss of the man used to be her husband. https://m. Days turned to weeks, weeks into months, and in all that time life slowly moved on for the Equestrians and the Barnums. Caroline, the girls, and their friends did everything they could to enjoy each other’s company, but without Phineas and Rara it just wasn’t the same. True Caroline continued to excel at ballet, but what was the point? It always saddened her whenever a show was over, and she could see everyone there supporting her… except her father. Phineas, Rara, and Jenny were busy enjoying the spotlight that they absolutely had no idea how much they were being missed back home. Every night, Rara would open the shows to a standing ovation and Jenny would close with a showstopping number. When it was all said and done, the girls and Barnum would stand on stage to a cheering crowd who threw flowers at them. At this time, the spotlight and fame were all that mattered to them. As for the circus troupe, Erik and Philip somehow kept everything together as best they could. Yet without Barnum, the circus life just wasn’t the same. More and more protestors continued showing up by the day and made life ‘miserable’ for the circus. Lord knows it was only a matter of time before everything they had built would fall apart at the seams. Dinners at the Barnum Mansion were especially lonely for the Barnums and the Equestrians. Even after they’d break their bread and enjoy a wonderful meal Charity would prepare, the atmosphere was just too gloomy for them to enjoy. All they could think about was loved ones who couldn’t be with them tonight nor any night for that mattered. Picking at her food, Rainbow Dash briefly turned to an empty chair meant for a certain ‘marefriend’ and for once she was more worried than usual. She had a rough idea where she was, as Rainbow Dash’s eyes gazed up as if she could look past the ceiling. Most nights, Applejack would be in the guest room mainly by herself and she’d been very depressed since her fight with Rara. Granted, she wasn’t really sorry for what she deemed to be the honest truth (As harsh as she may have been) but she never felt so alone even among her friends and her marefriend... not till now. Once more, one of her oldest friends was gone, out of her life again… only this time, A.J. truly wasn’t sure if she’d ever see her again. But then, after what they each had to say, Rara likely wouldn't want anything to do with Applejack anymore. Trying her best to hold back any tears, she leaned back on the bed and tipped her hat so far down her face so none could see… but that didn’t stop her from silently weeping into the cold, lonely night. From Now OnIt had officially been two months since Phineas and Rara departed for their tour with Jenny Lind. So far, things couldn’t be any better for them. Every single show they performed had an even bigger audience than the last, the reviews were amazing, and things couldn’t seem to get any better for them. Or at least… so they thought. For the first few weeks on tour, Rara had no problem with the performing the way she always had. However, shortly afterward, things changed for the little pony. Every night, she’d go onstage and perform for her loving public. But after the second month, as she gazed out through the crowd, she paid little mind to her adoring fans. Instead, all she could think about was her friends… especially Applejack. Ever since that horrible fight they had, before she went with Barnum on tour, initially Rara was glad to get away and perform any way she wanted. But after a while, she started missing having her friends around. To laugh with, to celebrate with her, and all together a band of girls (And Spike) just having a good time. As much as she adored being a famous singer, what was the point if there’s no pony around to share it with? All these thoughts raced through her head as she sat on the sofa in the shared penthouse suite she shared with Jenny and Phineas in their hotel in Cincinnati. On the couch across from her, Phineas and Jenny were celebrating all their success so far as they read the latest review from Mr. Bennett himself. “’It is as though we have learned for the first time what singing really is’,” Jenny read. “’Miss Lind deserves our nation’s highest esteem and most lavish ovations’.” Hearing her read the article made Phineas ecstatic beyond words. An amazing article from a man who originally thought him a fraud, as if everything he’s done to earn his respect was worth everything. “I mean…” He stammered. “The world is at our feet,” Jenny smiled. “Don’t you think so Miss Coloratura?” This snapped Rara out of her thoughts, as she put on a big fake smile. “Oh um—yes! It’s amazing,” She replied, half-heartedly. Jenny stood up from the couch and grabbed a few glasses for them all before pouring them all some wine. She handed one for Rara and the other for Barnum. “Well Mr. Barnum, Miss Coloratura,” She smiled. “This… is… to making dreams come true.” All three proceeded to clink their glasses together in a toast before taking a drink. “Thank you, Jenny,” Barnum thanked her. Both Barnum and Jenny gazed into each other straight in the eyes. For a moment, they were both completely frozen. The more Phineas looked at her, the more he realized what he left behind just to come here. Was all this really worth leaving his loving wife and two beautiful children behind? Eventually, he snapped himself out of his gaze. “It’s two hours to curtain,” He noted. “I’ve given you the world, haven’t I?” Jenny asked, smirking. “I—I, uh—I should go,” Phineas stammered. “I… I’ve become a distraction. I’m sorry, Jenny.” Hearing him say that confused Jenny greatly. “You should finish the tour without me.” “What?” Jenny asked, shocked. “You’re leaving?” “Well, the itinerary’s well in hand.” “So, that’s it,” Jenny said, feeling hurt. “What do you mean?” “I’m just another one of your little acts.” Jenny quickly set her drink down and stood up before proceeding to storm out of the room. “Jenny!” Phineas called out. “I’m done!” Jenny declared angrily. “Jenny. Jenny, please! You have to finish the tour.” “Must I?” “It—It will ruin me!” Phineas pleaded. “When you’re careless with other people, Mr. Barnum, you bring ruin upon yourself,” Jenny scoffed. “I have risked everything.” “Well, so did I,” Jenny replied tearfully. “And it seems we both lost.” Jenny turned around again and left the room without looking back. This left Barnum and Rara having the whole room to themselves. The popstar pony slowly walked alongside the disgruntled showman until they both faced one another. “What have we done?” Barnum asked her. “I know what we did,” Rara answered sadly. “We left everything and everyone we love so dearly behind. And for what?” “I was so tired of feeling like less than a man,” Barnum replied. “I wanted to show the world that Phineas Taylor Barnum was something special. And it cost me everything.” “I wanted to be the biggest star the world ever knew so badly, I’d push away my best friend to do it… again,” Rara whimpered. “Oh sweet Celestia… I’ve made a terrible mistake!” Rara was the next to run out of the room in tears, until only P.T. Barnum remained… entirely alone. <> Later that night, another performance was in process at the concert hall in Cincinnati. However, there was not nearly as much joy and adulation normally felt by Jenny, Rara, or even Barnum. Rara utterly refused to sing that night, preferring to remain backstage with Phineas. Barnum himself seemed millions of miles away in his head as he silently watched the performance. As for Jenny, she felt so sad and heartbroken as she stood out upon that stage and sung shakily. The performance finally came to an end, as the audience applauded and stood on their feet in respect. Cameras flashed all around as Jenny took a bow before them despite the less than perfect performance. Phineas eventually came out to stand alongside her and waved toward the audience. “Thank you,” He whispered to her. And then… the most unexpected thing happened. Jenny stepped forward and quickly kissed Barnum full on the lips as another camera flashed. Behind the scenes, Rara gasped loudly with surprise and covered her mouth with her hoof. To say she was shocked beyond words was the biggest understatement of them all. Phineas quickly drew back when Jenny kissed him, too stunned to put together what happened. “What was that?” He asked her. “That was goodbye,” Jenny spoke flatly. And without another word, Jenny Lind turned away and walked off stage. Rara raced alongside Phineas, who looked toward her in shock. “Did that really just happen Mr. Barnum?” She asked him. “I’m afraid it did,” He nodded. “Oh, I hope Charity will understand,” Rara spoke uncertainly. “She knows you’d never—” “That’s for me to worry about,” Phineas replied. “Now, I’m on my way to the train station and I’m going back to my family. Are you coming?” Rara looked up at Barnum with a content smile on her face. “Try and stop me,” She smiled. Phineas smiled back at her, as they both quickly ran for the door and toward the train station as fast as possible. After so long being blinded of the fact that all they needed was their family and friends, they weren’t about to waste a single second. They could only hope it was not too late. <> On the other side of the country, another miraculous show just concluded for the Barnum and Bailey Circus. As the many loyal patrons filed out of the building, Erik watched from the background as he often did for most of the show. When Barnum left, everyone wondered if he’d be the new ringmaster… but he preferred working behind the scenes as usual. Ergo, he permitted Philip to take the reigns for the time being. Speaking of the young Carlyle, Philip himself wished all the people a pleasant farewell for the evening up front. “Hey, thank you very much for coming,” He waved. “Tell your friends and neighbors! What a wonderful show! Who enjoyed themselves? You? You? Tell everyone how much fun you had at the circus! New acts every night!” Erik watched the young man with a sense of pride, considering how far he’s come in such a short time. He did not linger on these thoughts for very long though, as he turned his attention toward a rather solemn group of ponies and a teenage dragon. The Mane Six and Spike participated in the show of course, performing to the best of their abilities. But now that it was over, they were all just as glum and gloomy as ever. It had been this way since Rara left a few months prior and Erik quickly grew more concerned for their well-being, especially Applejack. When Applejack was not performing for the crowd, she didn’t talk much to anybody not even with the troupe. She’d huddle in some corner by herself and when she looked toward one direction it seemed as though she was looking into space. She’d sit in some corner, silent as a statue, she’d barely even eat or even sleep. And sometimes at night, when her friends would pass by to check, they could hear her… crying. It was proving more serious than even Twilight, Rainbow Dash, or any of her friends could imagine. After all, Applejack would always cry on the inside… least, that’s what she claimed. Walking up alongside his wife and friends, Erik sat alongside them following tonight’s performance. “Another show come and gone,” He sighed. “Yet despite all the joy in the audience, we have little to celebrate ourselves.” “Ain’t no point in celebratin’ when we’re one pony short,” Applejack groaned. “Yeah… it’s the ‘Star Wars’ incident all over again,” Pinkie sighed. “Aw, come on A.J.!” Rainbow spoke to her marefriend. “You’ve been depressed for two months straight.” “What would you expect darling?” Rarity asked. “Her best friend since foalhood walked out on all of us. She deliberately dismantled their entire friendship, and for what? Fame and fortune! How exactly would you feel if Tank up and left you after everything you’ve done for him?” Just the thought of her precious pet abandoning her and never coming back instantly made Rainbow shut up. She turned away before any pony could notice the tears welling in her eyes over that single thought alone. “Man, I never thought things would be ‘this’ upsetting since the day Tirek tried stealing all the magic in Equestria,” Spike huffed. “At least we defeated him and made everything right,” Fluttershy sighed sadly. “But this… I don’t even know what we’re supposed to do.” As for Pinkie Pie, as if she wasn’t already feeling depressed enough. When they looked at her, her hair was flattened out and her coat started losing its color again. There had been several instances when this would occur, and always when something really bad happened. “I really wish I had my Cheesy and Lil’ Cheese to make me feel better,” She sighed. “Right now, I feel nothing… I don’t even care about this stupid mission anymore. I just want to go home.” Erik felt so bad seeing his friends in such distress, and he looked at Twilight Sparkle, she just shook her head sadly. She had no answers to resolve this matter this time, and she had no words of encouragement to give. As if matters couldn’t get any worse, Erik turned over and noticed a very familiar group of men remaining near the tent. He knew it was them because they were certainly not a friendly bunch. “Wait here…” Erik spoke, before walking out. “Hey! Ringmaster!” One man called Philip. “Gentlemen, gonna have to ask you to leave,” Philip replied. All the men started to snicker as though Philip were telling a joke. “This is ‘our’ town, son,” The man spoke rudely. “We think you should leave. You and your freaks… and your spooks.” No Philip was started to get very angry; he would not ‘tolerate’ this assault on his new family. “Sir… I will only ask once more,” He warned. “Then what, boy?” “I’d listen to him if I were you.” The men turned over and saw Erik himself, walking toward them with his Punjab lasso twirling in one hand. Not only that, but W.D. Wheeler accompanied him ready for a fight. “Leave our circus...” Erik warned. “And stay away from our family.” “What are you going to do about it… freaks?” The man mocked. And just like that… all hell broke loose! W.D. threw the first punch, right in the man’s face, and the fight was on. Erik lashed out with a series of punches of his own, knocking down every man in front of him one by one. However, the two men alone couldn’t handle this mob of men for long and soon were overwhelmed as two of them grabbed Erik while the others beat the holy shit on W.D. “Get him!” A sudden rainbow blur swooped in and sent a man flying backwards. Erik looked up with a smirk as Rainbow Dash swooped in and laid waste on all the men in her wake. “I’ve had just about enough of you jerks!” She growled. “So… have… ah!” Applejack barreled in and tackled one guy to the ground. The rest of the Mane Six and Spike joined the fray, along with the rest of the troupe. “Charge!” Lettie yelled. The wolf boy took a man down with a spinning head-scissor, while the tattooed man leapt into the air to take down a man with a flying clothesline. The Lord of Leeds bounced one man back with his huge belle, while Lette held another guy in a headlock. Spike bonked two men’s heads together before sweeping their legs from under them with a flick of his tail. As they tried to pick themselves up, Applejack finished them both with powerful kicks to the head sending teeth flying out. Twilight and Rarity used their magic to fight back several men, while Fluttershy summoned her animal friends from the circus to hold the rest at bay. One man broke off from the rest of the group, ran backstage, and picked up a lit lantern from the table. Desperate, he chucked toward the back of the room and the moment it broke on impact a large blaze had been lit. <> Meanwhile, at the train station, Phineas and Rara just got off their train and left the station. Phineas turned to the side and smiled upon seeing Caroline and Helen running towards him. “Daddy!” They yelled happily. They both hugged their father in a tight grip, as the man laughed with joy upon hugging his two beautiful girls again. Rara watched this tender scene and couldn’t help but smile. “Girls, girls, girls!” He laughed. “Oh, you’ve grown so much. Stop it.” The girls pulled back as Charity walked up with a huge smile on her face and hugged her husband. “What made you decide to come back early?” She asked. “I missed you,” Phineas replied. “That sounds an awful lot like humbug,” Charity giggled. “And Rara, your friends will be so surprised to see you back.” “Hopefully the ‘good’ kind of surprised,” Rara said nervously. “I haven’t exactly left on the best of terms. They probably hate me.” “Oh, that’s ridiculous!” Charity shook her head. “Your friends have been miserable since they left, especially Applejack. Why for the past two months, she hardly ever left her room except for shows and if absolutely necessary.” “Really?” Rara spoke, feeling guilty. “I have to see her…” But before their conversation could continue, the ringing of a bell drew their attention as a fire carriage rolled by at an alarming rate. “Fire!” A firefighter yelled. “Move aside! Move aside! Come on! Hurry! It’s coming from the circus.” This made both Barnum and Rara extremely on edge, scared even. “Girls, stay with me!” He ordered. “Come. Quick, quick! Everyone, stay close!” With that, the Barnum’s and Rara ran as fast as they possibly could to reach the circus. Rara silently prayed the entire way that it wasn’t already too late. Eventually, they came around the corner and to their horror they saw the circus building in a complete inferno. Thankfully, most of the troupe already fled the building including the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik. “Philip! Is everyone out?” Erik yelled. “Is everyone okay?” “Yeah!” Philip responded. “What about the animals?” Fluttershy asked worriedly. “Don’t worry, we set them free,” Philip assured her. “What else could we do?” It was by that moment Barnum and Rara ran alongside them much to the surprise of the troupe, especially the Mane Six. “Rara!” They all yelled. “What are you doing back?” Twilight asked. “I came back because I couldn’t stand being without you guys,” Rara replied tearfully. “I only wish I never left at all.” “W.D., where’s Anne?” Philip asked worriedly. Rara looked toward the rest of the Mane Six and her eyes widened in fear. It was then she noticed that one of them was missing. “Sweet Celestia, where’s Applejack?!” She yelled. “Where’s Anne?” Phineas asked. “Where’s Applejack?” Philip turned back toward the burning building with the fear that Anne and Applejack may very well still be inside. Thinking on a whim, he quickly started running back into the building. “No, Philip! No!” Rara couldn’t stand the fact her best friend could very well be in there either. She quickly broke away from the others to follow Philip inside. “Rara, no!” The ponies and Spike yelled. The inferno continued to build and grow immensely out of control by the minute. Now Philip and Rara both ran back into the blaze. Everyone watched in fear and trepidation. Their attention turned to the side as they saw Anne and Applejack helping each other out of the other side. “Anne!” Phineas yelled. “Applejack!” The Mane Six yelled. The girls and Spike quickly ran to embrace their friend, who was covered in soot and Phineas draped a blanket around Anne. It was then that all their attention quickly returned to the building when they realized the horror of the situation. “Philip! Rara!” “What are we going to do?!” Twilight yelled. Phineas turned back toward Erik and they both shared the same crazy idea. Nodding to one another, Phineas quickly brought Anne back to her brother. “W.D.! Here she is! Here she is!” “Anne! Oh my God!” W.D. gasped with relief. Erik knelt down to hug and kiss his wife. “If I don’t come back, take care of our child,” He told her. Erin and Phineas both raced ahead into the blaze to rescue their friends. “Philip!” Phineas yelled. “Rara!” Erik yelled. “No! Daddy!” Caroline and Helen cried. “Daddy! Daddy!” The building groaned as the blaze rose higher and higher. Soon enough, it became too much to bear as the roof collapsed and fell down with a crash on the ground. Everyone watched in worry, as the Mane Six and Spike held onto each other while Charity and the girls looked on nervously. Suddenly, from inside the blaze, two figures slowly emerged carrying two other forms. Everyone was relieved to see Phineas and Erik emerge from the blaze coughing from the smoke and covered in soot. Phineas carried Philip, who was covered in soot, burn marks, and even a few burns on his body. Erik carried Rara, who had much of her coat and mane burned off and singed. “Daddy!” Caroline and Helen cried in relief. “Thank Celestia!” Spike and the girls cried. “Stretcher!” A fireman ordered. “Stretcher!” Phineas and Erik coughed as they positioned Philip and Rara on the ground. “They’ve taken a lot of smoke,” Phineas said. “They’re still breathing. Come on.” A few firefighters came in with two stretchers to life the unconscious pair up and get them to the hospital for immediate treatment. “Come on, let’s get them on!” The firefighters lifted the two up and loaded them into a carriage which immediately took off down the road towards the hospital. Everyone watched in horror as they were taken away and the firefighters started to extinguish the inferno. Barnum held his family and Erik clutched on Rarity tightly as everyone breathed a sigh of relief that this horror show was finally over. <> At the local hospital, the tension in the air was so thick that it could have been cut with a knife. Both Philip and Rara were laid up on hospital beds side by side and they were covered in soot and burn marks. Anne Wheeler sat right by Philip’s side the whole time, while the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik stood by Rara’s bedside. Applejack was the most distraught as she held her friend’s lifeless hoof and allowed the tears she normally held back to flow. “This is all mah fault!” She sobbed. “I never shoulda made her come.” “No, it isn’t A.J.,” Rainbow assured, rubbing her back. “You didn’t tie her up and drag her here. We wanted her to come because she’s our best friend. There’s no way you could’ve seen this coming.” “But ah did!” Applejack cried. “From the moment she came tah me, tellin’ me ‘bout them reviews, somehow ah just ‘knew’ she’d end up fallin’ back into bein’ Countess Coloratura. Me lettin’ come here gave her just wut was needed tah push her there.” “There’s no way that’s true Applejack,” Rarity spoke up. “You did ‘everything’ you possibly could as her friend to help her. You can’t blame yourself for what happened to her.” “If anything, I blame the people of this world… and a good deal of ponies back in ours,” Spike nodded. “Just because someone’s different or talented that they feel the need to tear them down and make them look bad. Now look what’s happened.” “I guess sometimes the real evil we fight isn’t always some big scary supervillain bent on world domination,” Twilight said somberly. “Sometimes the worst evil is what’s secretly hidden deep within someone’s own heart.” But Applejack wasn’t listening to what her friends were saying. She retained her focus on her unconscious friend. “The last thing ah said tah her was that she weren’t mah friend,” She sobbed. “Ah’ll never live with mahself if that really is the last thing ah ever said to her.” The rest of the Mane Six tried to comfort their distraught friend, as Erik slowly made his way over to Anne Wheeler, who just stared at Philip and clutched his burnt hand in her own. As tears came to her eyes, she softly and sadly sang a familiar song with shaky breaths. Anne (Sings): What if we rewrite the stars? Say you were made to be mine? Nothing can keep us apart You are the one I was meant to find Feeling a hand on her shoulder, Anne slowly looked back and saw Erik looking down at her with a look of sympathy and sorrow. “Despite everything you’ve been through, he truly loves you,” Erik said. Anne let the tears fall freely as she turned back toward Philip. “I know…” She croaked. For the rest of the night, the group stood watching over their fallen friends. Many tears were shed in sadness over the fact this was started simply because the world refused to accept what was different. <> The next morning… Phineas looked through the charred remains of what was once his greatest creation. The entire building was destroyed, along with everything in it. Phineas knew the fire was started by a group of men who hated what he built, but he blamed himself more than he did them. He allowed his ego and desire to get in the way of what mattered most to him, and he left it all behind. That was the reason why his entire circus was destroyed and two of his friends in the hospital right now. As if his anguish couldn’t get any worse, he turned around and saw Mr. Bennett standing behind him looking at the remains of the circus. “If you’ve come to gloat, I wouldn’t,” He sighed. Bennett walked alongside him and dusted off a spot with his newspaper before taking a seat next to the showman. “They caught the thugs who started the fire,” He informed. “I thought you’d like to know.” Both men just sat there for a few minutes as they sighed until Bennett finally decided to speak once more. “I never liked your show,” He said honestly. “But I always thought the people did.” “They did,” Barnum nodded. “They do.” “Mind you, I wouldn’t call it art.” “Of course not.” Then, for the first time since they first met, Bennett actually had a genuine honest review. “But... putting folks of all kinds on stage with you… all colors… shapes, sizes… presenting them as equals… why, another critic might have even called it… ‘a celebration of humanity’.” Hearing this made Barnum smile toward the usually cynical critic. “I would’ve liked that,” He said. “Well, I hope you’ll rebuild,” Bennett said hopefully. “I mean, thank God for Jenny’s tour,” Barnum smiled. “We can borrow off the profits, we’ll be fine.” “You don’t know?” Bennet asked confused. Barnum looked at Bennett with confusion before Bennett handed him the newspaper that he had. Barnum looked toward the front page and his eyes widened with shock. For on that page was a picture of Jenny kissing him with the headline, ‘Jenny Lind Quits’. “I’m sorry,” Bennett apologized. The critic soon took his leave as Barnum continued to stare at the paper in shock. He knew it was only a matter of time before this reached the public and now surely this would cause quite the scandal for him. Then another thought came to his head, one even worse than the last. Quickly dropping the paper, he raced for home. When he finally arrived, he pushed the door open and called out for his wife. “Charity?!” He called. Charity herself walked down the steps carrying a suitcase in hand. She looked at him with such hurt, such disappointment. The worst expressions he hoped to never see. “Oh, God, Charity. I am—” “I don’t wanna talk to you!” Charity interrupted. “N—Nothing happened!” He assured her. “This is ridiculous!” “Oh, sure. Nothing happened,” She responded skeptically. ‘It’s on the cover of every paper in New York.” “Because she orchestrated the photo,” Barnum replied. “I’m not in love with her!” “Of course you’re not,” Charity spoke angrily. “Not with her, not with me, not with anyone. Just you and your show.” “What are you doing?” “I’m going home.” “This is your home.” Charity reached into her pocket and handed Phineas what could only be identified as eviction papers. “The bank… they’re evicting us,” Charity told him. “Why didn’t you ask me before… I would’ve said yes. I never minded the risk, but we always did it together.” And just like that, Charity walked out the front door and slammed it loudly behind her. Soon Phineas found himself standing there, looking around the big enemy house which soon enough the bank would be coming to collect. Sighing to himself, he slumped down on the steps reflecting on the horrible mistake he made. He had it all when it was just him, Charity, and the girls. Only he gave it all up for fame and fortune. Now he was left with absolutely nothing but an empty heart and some burn marks. It turned out having it all meant ending up with nothing. <> A short while later, Phineas found himself sitting at a bar drinking away what remained of his money. He gambled everything that mattered to him most and in the end he lost it all. Now he sat as nothing more than a shell of a man, much like the circus peanuts he used to pick up after every show. He knew he deserved it considering how stupid he’d been as of late. Now it was far too late to go back to how things used to be. The sound of the door opening drew his attention to Charles and Erik walking in. Erik walked over and took a seat next to him. Charles climbed onto the counter and walked down in front of him. “Figured you’d end up here,” Charles smirked. “Feeling sorry for yourself.” Barnum merely sighed as he threw back another drink before facing Erik. “How are Philip and Rara?” He asked. “They’ll live…” Erik responded. “They’re currently unconscious and the doctors are uncertain if they’ll wake up.” “I should’ve listened to you and Philip when I had the chance,” He sighed. “You warned me this would happen, and I gambled it all away anyway. Now look at me, I have nothing.” The door opened again, as the rest of the circus troupe entered the establishment. Barnum shook his head as he continued to drink in despair. “Folks, if you’ve come to get paid, the money is gone,” He said. “All of it. Nothing left to give you—” “Shut up, Barnum!” Lettie scolded. “You just don’t get it. Our own mothers were ashamed of us. His us our whole lives. Then you pull us out of the shadows. And now you’re giving up on us, too. Maybe you are a fraud. Maybe it was just about making a buck. But you gave us a real family.” “And the circus… that was our home,” W.D. continued. “We want our home back.” Barnum was beyond shocked that even after ‘everything’ he had done, these people were still willing to stand by him. It made him really think just how badly he screwed up, and how badly he wanted to make amends. So with that in his head, he made a promise not only to them but to himself as well. That he would never again allow himself to fall so far as he had before. And he did it the only way he knew how… in song. Realizing he still had so much to make up for, Barnum quickly ran out the door as fast as he could. He ran toward the direction of the one thing he loved the most, but never realized just how much until it was gone. He kept running forward while the rest of the oddities hung at the bar, singing and dancing together as one happy family. <> Meanwhile… In the hospital, Anne held Philip’s hand tightly and the Mane Six and Spike did the same with Rara. As they all sat together, hoping for a miracle, Spike and Rainbow Dash turned toward a corner and saw Applejack just sitting in one of the empty beds looking sadly toward the floor. Leaving the others to watch for Rara, they slowly made their way toward Applejack and took a seat beside her and for a moment they sat there quietly. “A.J… would you mind if I ask… a stupid question?” Spike asked nervously. “I guess…” Applejack sighed. “Did you… like Rara? I mean… did you like her more than a friend?” “I won’t get too upset if that was the case,” Rainbow assured. “I mean, it would sting not being the first. But I won’t hold it against you.” For a moment, Applejack said not another word, she just released a heavy sigh. Then eventually, she turned her gaze toward Spike and then Rainbow Dash. “Rara was not that kind of mare,” Applejack answered honestly. “But she was the only one who knew what kind of a pony I was when we were kids. I was still trying to figure myself out, but she still treated me just the same. I enjoyed spending time with her, playing my guitar while she’d sing. Hmm… she was even responsible for the ‘Apple Chord’ gimmick.” “You mean… that was real?” Rainbow asked. “Yeah… Apple Chord, the ever talented, very famous country star who is not afraid to be herself. A pony who could do just about anything, ‘be’ any pony she wants. That made me feel… free. Rara always talked about taking our acts to Manehattan, where all ponies go to be ‘really’ famous.” “And here I thought you went to the big city to live with your aunt and uncle,” Spike inquired. “The truth is that was only partially the reason. I went to Manehattan to find Rara, to keep our promise of running our act together. But I never did find her those years back, and up until she came to Ponyville that day… I thought I’d never will. She says she learned to be true to herself because of me… but she helped me be true to my own self. To give me the courage… to fall in love with you Rainbow.” Rainbow smiled as she slowly wrapped a hoof around Applejack, holding her marefriend close as Spike leaned beside the girls. Just then, they heard a moan, and some stirring drew the trio to look. Finally, after so long, Philip and Rara started to move and awaken much to the immense joy and relief of their loved ones. Philip looked upon Anne’s face and smiled at her as she shed a tear for him. “You came…” He smiled. Anne didn’t respond with words, she merely knelt down and kissed him like she wanted to do for the longest time. While they did this, Rara slowly pushed herself out of bed with the Equestrians carefully helping her along. Rara made one look and saw Applejack eyeing her with the same shimmering eyes as her. For a moment they uttered not a word, just stared. Until suddenly, Applejack raced forward, and her friends watched as she and Rara hugged tightly. “Oh thank Celestia yer alright!” Applejack cried. “Ah thought ah done lost ya forever. Ah’d never live with mahself if the last thing we did was fight.” “It’s okay A.J…” Rara assured her. “Truth be told, you had ‘every’ right to call me out like you did. I was losing myself again, just as you said would happen. I was so caught up with the world seeing me as worthless I forgot that all that mattered was what ‘my’ friends think of me.” “What about your music career?” Twilight asked. “None of it matters, not without my friends by my side every step of the way.” The ponies and Spike hugged one another in joy over the fact they were all friends again and all was right with the world. All of a sudden, Pinkie Pie’s ears perked up as she thought she could hear a melody somewhere in the distance. “Does any pony besides me hear singing?” Pinkie asked. “Shh… we’re having a moment Pinkie,” Fluttershy hushed gently. The Greatest ShowAt the Hallet mansion, Caroline and Helen stood at the window looking out toward New York City in the distance. They missed their father terribly, wishing more than anything that they could be a family again… just like they used to. They cared not for riches or the fancy life, only that they were all together and having fun like in a fairy tale. As the thoughts of never having that started to course through their heads, they both suddenly snapped out of it when they noticed their father climbing up the drive towards the house. “Caroline! He’s here!” Helen shouted joyfully. They both raced from the room and down the stairs to meet their father just as there was a knock at the front door. Mr. Hallet was the first to answer and a look of disdain spread on his face the moment he saw Phineas standing on the other side. Phineas, meanwhile, had the biggest smile and a look of determination. “I would like to see my wife,” He said. “She’s not here,” Mr. Hallet responded. “She’s at the beach!” Caroline yelled from the stairs. Phineas looked up and smiled toward his beloved daughters who smiled back with enthusiasm. They both descended the stairs rapidly and embraced him in a massive hug which he gave back tenfold. “Oh how I’ve missed you my darling daughters,” He laughed. “We missed you too daddy,” Helen replied. “Promise that you’ll never leave us again,” Caroline added. Phineas pulled back as he looked into his daughter’s eyes. “I swear on it,” He smiled. “No, you have to ‘Pinkie Promise’!” Helen giggled. “Pinkie Promise?” Barnum asked confused. “It’s something Aunt Pinkie Pie taught us,” Caroline nodded. “You have to say, ‘Cross my heart, hope to fly, stick a cupcake in my eye’.” Barnum chuckled in amusement, as he watched his daughters demonstrate the secret promise they learned from their new friend. Still he decided he would do whatever it took to make things up with his family. He proceeded to then do the following steps of the Pinkie Promise. “Cross my heart, hope to fly, stick a cupcake in my eye,” He smirked. Caroline and Helen both squealed with glee as they hugged their father once more. “Okay girls, I’ll be back in a moment,” Barnum said. “I have to go see your mother really quick.” Barnum pulled away from the girls and started his way out the door toward the beach. Before he could get too far, he was grabbed by Mr. Hallet, who looked him dead in the eye. Phineas waited for the inevitable lecture he no doubt deserved, but it never came. All that happened as Mr. Hallet giving him a nod and one simple request. “Take care of my daughter,” He said. He held out his hand which really surprised Phineas. Nonetheless, he took it willingly and shook it with a smile. “I promise you that I would,” He replied. Barnum soon turned heel and ran straight out of the house down the beach. When he got there, he saw Charity standing there on the very spot they had as kids and just stared toward the sunset. Phineas walked down and stood right beside her, causing her to dart her eyes in his direction and then back toward the sunset. Phineas wasn’t about to go on a ‘huge’ tangent like he normally would in the past. Instead, he opted to speak directly from the heart. “I brought hardship on you and our family,” He spoke honestly. “You warned me… and I wouldn’t listen. I just… I wanted to be more than I was.” Charity turned her head and looked directly at him right in the eyes. “I never wanted anything but the man I fell in love with,” She said. Phineas nodded his head in understanding and proceeded to sing out once more with shaky breaths. Barnum (Sings): Let this promise in me start Like an anthem in my heart However big However small From now on “From now on…” He spoke finally. Smiling at the knowledge that the man she once loved was back, Charity threw her arms around her husband and he in turn did the same. They just stood there hugging for a while before they finally drew back and shared a loving kiss. As the sun set over the horizon, things seemed to be changing for Phineas Taylor Barnum and his family at last. <> The next day, the entire circus troupe stood amongst the ashes of the building that had one been their home and sorted through the charred rubble. The Mare Six, Spike, Erik, and Rara were all there as well with Applejack helping Rara around in case she needed help. Despite Rara’s constant comments that she was already to walk on her own, Applejack being ever so stubborn wouldn’t hear of it. Especially after being separated for the past two months. “I can’t believe everything’s gone,” Spike commented. “All in a blaze that would make even Ember jealous.” “Let’s not think on the negatives at the moment,” Fluttershy advised. “Maybe Mr. Barnum will get a lone and be able to rebuild.” “I doubt that…” Rainbow replied. “After already being scammed, the bank won’t lend him any more money.” “You never know darling,” Rarity spoke up. “We just have to keep positive every pony,” Twilight spoke optimistically. “Things are starting to fall into place. I can feel it.” “That’s the Pinkie Pie spirit!” Pinkie smiled, giving Twilight the one-armed hug. “Besides, after everything that’s happened already…” “Don’t… you… dare… finish!” Rainbow hissed in Pinkie’s face. The pink party pony nodded emphatically and actually turned her mouth into a zipper and zipped it shut. Rainbow floated on back to the ground next to her marefriend just as Barnum walked up to the rest of the group. Philip and Erik walked up for a word with their partner. “Bank said no?” “Emphatically,” Barnum nodded. “Repeatedly. I don’t think there’s a banker left in the country I can fool into loaning me more money, so… I’m really sorry to disappoint you all.” “Don’t worry, Barnum,” Charles assured. “We’ve gotten used to it by now.” Everyone laughed at that before a smirk made its way to Philip’s face. “You know, Barnum… when I first met you… I had an inheritance, acclaim, an invitation to every party in town,” He spoke. “And now, thanks to you, all that’s gone. “Wow… great pep talk Phil,” Rainbow said sarcastically. “I wasn’t finished,” Philip responded. “All that’s left is friendship, love, and work that I adore. You brought joy into my life.” “Into all our lives,” Lettie nodded. “Hear, hear!” Everyone agreed. Hearing him say this brought a smile to Barnum’s face once more. “If only the bank would take joy as collateral,” He chuckled. “They may not… but I will,” Erik replied. “As will I,” Philip agreed. “I own 10% of the show. Knowing who I was working for… I had the good sense to take my cut weekly.” “And owning the other 45% of this show, I also purchased your shares when you forfeited them,” Erik added. “I was able to invest that money into a good deal of thriving businesses and increased our profits significantly.” “Hot dang Erik, you really are a sly devil!” Spike chuckled. “Indeed my young friend,” Erik replied, patting his scales. “Philip, Erik, I can’t let you gamble it on me,” Barnum shook his head. “Sure you can!” Philip smiled. “And you will,” Erik continued. “Don’t turn sensible on us now,” Lettie spoke up. Both Erik and Philip held out their hands to Barnum, hoping he’d accept their deal. Not even needing to think twice, Barnum shook both their hands and nodded. “Partners!” Philip smiled. “Split three ways even!” Erik nodded. “Partners,” Barnum agreed. Everyone cheered and laughed as the three partners made it official before Philip broke a little bit of news to them. “The only thing is… I don’t know how we’re gonna afford a building.” Once again, the ever-thinking Phineas Barnum had another ingenious idea. “We don’t need a building,” He stated. “Real estate in Manhattan is a terrible investment. Why, I can get land down by the docks for almost nothing! All we need… is a tent.” “Ooh, good thing I always keep one with me in case of emergencies!” Pinkie smiled. Reaching into her mane, Pinkie Pie pulled an assortment of items before pulling out the equipment needed for a giant circus tent. Everyone faced her with confusion, then over to the Mane Six. “It’s Pinkie Pie,” Twilight informed. “Best not to ask questions.” <> It was only a few days later that the circus business was booming again, as the Barnum and Bailey Circus tent was set up along the wharf. Patrons of all ages came to see the show as lights shined brightly in the tent and the atmosphere was rife with excitement. The fans excitedly stomped on the bleachers as a few shadowy figures walked beneath in the form of two men, several ponies, and a teenage dragon. In typical circus fashion, they introduced the show with a spectacle of a song. (Imagine the first part of this song from the first chapter) ]The Greatest Showman | "The Greatest Show" Lyric Video | Fox Family Entertainment - YouTube The troupe ran forward as they followed behind Barnum and his partners. Fluttershy led the animals behind them all including two elephants, two lions that leapt through flaming rings, and all assortment of amazing creatures. Barnum raced off stage where Philip waited on the sidelines watching them work. The Mane Six and Spike noticed this and ran off behind him, wondering what he was up to now. Barnum proceeded to take his own hat from his head and handed it to Philip. “This is yours now,” He smiled. Philip was a slight confused by all this but was also shocked beyond belief. From day one, Barnum was always the one the people came to see and now he was essentially passing the torch onto Philip. With a smile, the young Carlyle graciously accepted the hat and placed it on his head. “What will you do now?” Philip asked. “I’m gonna watch my girls grow up,” Phineas replied. Barnum then looked down at the Mane Six and Spike, kneeling to their height so he may thank them properly. “Thank you all so much,” He said appreciatively. “You all came to me and my family when we needed help the most. You took us to heights well beyond what we ever dreamed possible, and for that I will always be forever grateful.” “You are absolutely welcome Mr. Barnum,” Twilight smiled. “It’s been one heck of an adventure,” Spike added. “We’ll never forget this.” “And thank you Mr. Barnum, for helping me realize I don’t need to be a famous singer to feel loved,” Rara thanked him. “All I need are my friends and family. As long as I have that, I’m golden.” “Your welcome,” Phineas nodded. “Do say goodbye to Charity and the girls for us,” Rarity told him. “I most definitely will.” Barnum soon gave them all individual hugs before getting back up and raced through the back of the tent. Philip then looked toward the ponies and Spike with a smile. “Well guys, we have a show to finish,” He declared. “You know what I think will really make this show a spectacle?” Rainbow asked. She floated up and whispered into Philip’s ear. He then looked at her with confusion. “Can you really pull that off?” “Kid, I invented the move,” She said cockily. “Of course I can.” “Then I say… go for it!” Philip agreed. Then Philip and the ponies raced back onstage to finish what was surely the ‘Greatest Show on Earth’. Rainbow looked up toward the top of the tent where a single flap opened up. She took off into the air and soared straight through it. She flew as high as she possibly could, looked back down over the tent, and over all of New York. Giving a smile, she flew back down to Earth as fast as she possibly could. Eventually, she flew at such a super-sonic speed that it was actually getting difficult to stop her face from peeling back from the sheer force. The moment the song was over, Rainbow flew back in and hit one of the biggest Sonic Rainbooms she ever made. The force caused the audience to hold onto their seats as the rainbow flowed throughout the tent. When it was finished, everyone stood on their feet and applauded so loudly that it didn’t even seem possible. Everyone in the ensemble took a bow for the crowd before a strong wind picked up and everyone looked over to see the mirror portal opening up. Everyone stared in amazement as the Mane Six, Spike, Erik, and Rara all stepped forward. “Guess it’s time to head home,” Twilight pointed out. “Looks like it,” Spike nodded. They all turned back around to face the troupe of people they had really come to know and love throughout this entire journey. Philip and Anne both stepped forward to say their goodbyes personally. “Thank you guys,” Philip thanked first. “Not just for the show but for everything. I really don’t think we ever would’ve been able to accomplish all of this without your help.” “You guys helped us all find the family we’ve been looking for our entire lives,” Anne smiled tearfully. “Well, we certainly wouldn’t have been able to learn some really important things without you guys either,” Rara smiled back. “Now we can go back to our friends and families with some new knowledge and ideas for the future,” Fluttershy nodded. “Not to mention adding a new member to our lovely little community,” Erik smiled, placing a hand on Rarity’s stomach. “We’ll all miss you!” Lettie called from the troupe. The Mane Six and Spike all looked back at the ensemble with a few tears in their eyes before they went back and embraced every one of them in a hug. After that, they all turned back to the portal that would take them back home and slowly walked forward. With one last look over their shoulder, toward the smiling troupe waving at them, they waved back before stepping through the portal and thus bringing this spectacular journey to an end. The End A Bad DayAn array of grey clouds lined the sky on a dreary afternoon in New York City. Phineas Taylor Barnum typed away on a typewriter for his job, as an editorial for an accounting firm. Day after day was the same routine for Mr. Barnum, typing away for what little money he could make for his family. As he typed away, he thought back to the events of the day before and he still couldn’t believe all of it had happened. Unable to believe that a group of colorful talking ponies, a teenage dragon, and a former opera ghost were now staying with him and his family. Granted they were a very nice bunch, more than willing to help them out, it just seemed unbelievable. It made him wonder what else could be possible in the world. He was then suddenly shaken from his thoughts when his boss, Mr. Smith, started walking through the office. “Mr. Smith?” Chalmers called out. “Yes?” Smith responded. “Have a look at this,” Chalmers spoke, handing out a document. “Yes, yes I see it… thank you Chalmers, that will do.” Phineas quickly jumped from his desk and raced behind Smith with a look of determination on his face. “Sir, Phineas Taylor Barnum,” He introduced himself. “Uh, if I may sir, I believe I have skills and ideas that go well beyond punching numbers into an adding machine. I read about this German fellow, Lilienthal, I believe, who’s developed a glider that can take a man in the air, sir. Isn’t that amazing? I mean, if you were to apply that to this business, it would be revolutionary.” Smith seemingly ignored him as he made his way to the front of the office and turned back to address all of the employees. “Gentlemen!” He spoke loudly. “Can I have your attention?” Everyone looked up from their desks toward their boss, who seemed rather disheartened. “You’re all dismissed.” Everyone soon broke into light chatter, not knowing exactly what their boss was talking about. Barnum grabbed the piece of paper Smith was carrying and his eyes widened upon noticing what exactly was written on it. “Bankrupt?” He asked, in shock. “I thought the company had a dozen trading ships.” “Yes, at the bottom of the South China Sea,” Smith responded. “Typhoon sank ‘em all.” And just like that, Mr. Smith walked off leaving a now unemployed Phineas Barnum shocked beyond words. Here he was a man already struggling to make ends meet as it were when he was employed. Except now he no longer had a job. How was he possibly going to provide for his family now? <> Later that evening, as Phineas was returning home, all he could think about was how to break this news to his family. Having no job meant that likely he and his family will be evicted from their apartment, cast out onto the streets. Especially now that he was unable to find some form of income to support the family. Pushing the apartment door open, Phineas huffed upon noticing the still-leaking roof. He shook his head in shame knowing everything that was happening to him, and his family, had come so fast. One of the talking ponies, Rara he believed was her name, approached Barnum to greet him. “Welcome back, Mr. Barnum,” She greeted sweetly. “I hope your day went wonderfully.” “Yes… wonderful,” He grumbled sarcastically. “Are you alright sir?” Rara asked worriedly. “I’ll be fine,” Barnum brushed off. “Where are all the others?” “I believe they’re playing up on the roof.” Phineas released a chuckle and shook his head. Of course they’d do something like that. Just as he was about to head off to climb the fire escape to the roof, he instantly stopped in his tracks when he heard a voice softly singing. He slowly turned back toward Rara, who sung quietly to herself. But even then, he could tell she had a voice that sounded like a thousand angels harmonizing together. He slowly walked back toward her, kneeling to her height as he looked at her in utter amazement. “You have such an astonishing voice,” He admired. Rara blushed at his compliment but turned away with a shake of her head. “Not all ponies seem to agree,” She sighed sadly. “What do you mean?” “In the land where I come from, I always wanted to be a singer,” Rara explained. “Since I was small, that’s all I ever wanted to do with my life. Eventually I did achieve that dream, but lately ponies believe I’m washed up and no good anymore. I don’t know, maybe they’re right…” “That sounds like a load of nonsense if you ask me,” Barnum said. “You have a voice that could make birds swoop to the ground from jealousy. Perhaps we can come up with a plan to help others see what I see in you.” Rara looked upon Phineas as a smile crept its way onto her face. Perhaps he and all of her other friends were right. Here she was feeling sorry for herself and actually believing the nonsense of critics whose words really meant nothing to her. She, and she alone, could decide when her career was over. And by Celestia, she was going to shine even brighter than she ever did before. “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She smiled. “It’s really nice to hear you say that.” “You are most welcome,” Phineas responded. “Now come along, let’s go find the others.” Barnum then climbed out the window and started up the fire escape to the roof with Rara following closely behind. When they both reached the roof, they smiled when they saw Charity and his two girls playing with the others. Apparently they were playing some game about the old west with Charity and the girls pretending to be cowboys (Or ‘cowgirls’ in this case) while Applejack showed them how real cowpokes do it. “Hands in the air partners!” Applejack said playfully. “Yer fixin’ tah get lassoed by Sheriff Applejack!” The country pony pulled out her lasso and twirled it around as the girls raced around screaming with glee while Applejack hurled the lasso around trying to catch them. That is until Rainbow Dash zipped in and landed directly between Applejack and the two girls. “You want them?” She asked. “You’ll have to get through me, cowgirl!” “With pleasure!” Applejack grinned. From the sidelines, everyone else laughed and had a good time watching the girls and their old friends playing together. Rarity snuggled up closely toward Erik, watching and envisioning that very same future their own little one shall have someday soon. Charity looked over and noticed her husband and Rara stepping onto the roof. “You’re home early,” She smiled toward her husband. “And until further notice,” Phineas responded, handing the paper. Charity looked at the parchment, as a sad look formed across her face. However, she merely brushed it off and a smile returned as it had before. “Well, I didn’t think you were long for that job,” She said. “Or ‘any’ job, apparently,” Phineas sighed. “That’s what makes our life together so exciting.” Despite his wife’s cheerful outlook on everything, Phineas could not help but feel disappointed in himself. Back when they were children, he promised her the world. Now here he was unemployed and nowhere close to giving her ‘everything’ she deserved. “Charity,” He spoke ashamed. “This isn’t the life I promised you.” “But I have everything I want,” Charity responded. “What about the magic?” “What do you call those two girls?” Barnum looked over at the two little girls, who were still playing around with their new pony and dragon friends. Then Pinkie Pie popped out from nowhere, right between Phineas and Charity, making the pair jump in surprise. “Yeah! Or a group of walking-talking ponies and a dragon,” She giggled. “I mean it’s not something you see every day. Seems pretty magical.” “I suppose it does,” Phineas chuckled. “Hey, you partners, look who moseyed into the corral!” Charity called toward the girls. “Daddy!” They both exclaimed excitedly. They both ran up to their father, leaping into his embrace as they all laughed. The Equestrian group also walked alongside the family with smiles on their faces as well. “Welcome home, Mr. Barnum,” Twilight greeted kindly. “I do so hope your day went swimmingly darling,” Rarity said. “Eh, it was alright I suppose,” Barnum responded, with a shrug. Applejack instantly knew he was lying but decided not to call him out on it. For one thing, it was his business after all. She had no right to interfere with his favors. And at the same time, she could tell by the look upon his face that he was so disheartened. “Did you bring a present?” Caroline asked. “A present for what?” Barnum asked, faking confusion. “For my birthday!” *GASP!!!* A huge gasp came from Pinkie Pie herself, whose pupils shrank to the size of pinpricks and her mouth hung open. “Your what?!” She asked. “My birthday,” Caroline repeated. Almost instantaneously, a massive smile took over Pinkie’s whole face. She burst into the air with a rainbow trailing behind her. She exploded into a huge cloud of confetti before falling back to the ground wearing a party hat. “HAPPY BIRTHDAY!” She yelled loudly. She grabbed a few other party hats from her mane and stuck them in everyone else’s heads. “ooh… this is so super-duper, extra-super, ultra-amazing!” She spoke excitedly. “We absolutely have to celebrate the only way I know how… Pinkie Pie style! That means balloons everywhere, streams all around, games, cake, ice cream, pinatas…” As she listed off all the party items, Barnum and his entire family looked over toward the ponies and Spike for an explanation. All they could offer in return was a shrug of their shoulders. “Don’t ask… just don’t,” Spike sighed. Though they were still quite confused, they all shared a laugh all the same. “It’s not your birthday,” Phineas joked, earning his daughter’s playful glare. “Okay, I do have a present… but not just any present. Oh, no. The most amazing birthday present ever.” “Ooh… do tell darling,” Rarity spoke intrigued. “Is it something super awesome, like me?” Rainbow asked. “Well, I certainly hope so.” Phineas reached behind him and grabbed his briefcase which he then clicked open. Pulling it open, he pulled out what resembled a candle on a copper pedestal and some kind of copper cylinder with holes in it. “This extraordinary machine was originally created by Leonardo da Vinci, 400 years ago,” He explained. “Ah yes, the great Da Vinci,” Erik reminisced. “You know, I incorporated many of his designs when building most of my opera house.” “But the blueprints had been lost for centuries until just last week, on a stormy night,” Barnum continued. “When a sunken pirate ship washed up on the shores of Nantucket.” “They found skeletons and treasures, and the blueprints were recovered by none other than J.W. Mercantile. The blueprints crossed my desk very briefly, but I managed to commit them to memory. And if I have remembered correctly…” He assembled the machine to completion and when it was ready, he placed the cylinder over the candle. When he was finished, he gave the cylinder a spin and the light emanating from the little holes made it appear that thousands of little stars spun all around them. “Happy birthday, Caroline,” He said. “This is a wishing machine. You tell it your wishes and it keeps them safe until they come true. Even if you forget them, they’re always there.” “Can I tell a wish?” Helen asked. “Step right up. Go ahead.” Helen quickly ran up and knelt down as she closed her eyes tightly and made a wish. “I wish to marry Santa Claus,” She giggled. “Not a bad wish,” Spike chuckled. “If someone brought me gifts all the time, I’d marry them too. Then again, maybe that’s just the greedy dragon in me talking.” “Oh Spike!” Twilight giggled, rolling her eyes. “That is a good wish,” Barnum chuckled. Then Caroline came up and closed her eyes as well. “I wish… for ballet slippers.” “Oh my, that’s a very lovely wish Caroline,” Fluttershy smiled. “What’s your wish, Mommy?” Caroline asked her mother. Charity walked over and looked toward the little spinning device. She smiled toward her husband and two little girls. “I wish for happiness like this forever, for you and you… and for your father.” “Boring!” Barnum and Rainbow Dash chuckled. “Boring?” Charity laughed. “Since when was happiness ever been boring?” “Nothing wrong with wanting to be happy,” Rainbow assured. “I just figured you’d wish for something like a new place or something. No offense, but this apartment right now is… crummy.” “Don’t y’all be so rude hun!” Applejack lightly scolded. While they spoked, Caroline and Helen looked on in admiration as they watched the lights dance across the sheets on the rooftop. As they both watched, they imagined so many wondrous things in their heads. Having these thoughts in their heads made the two girls want to sing. Phineas watched as his girls both sang; he couldn’t help but admire just how much they reminded him of himself and his wife when they were their age. It was then that an imaginary lightbulb went off in his head as he finished. Standing quickly, he walked toward Erik and Rarity. He looked down toward the former opera ghost who looked at him in confusion. “Can I help you?” Erik asked curiously. “I certainly hope so my friend,” Phineas responded with a smile. Though Erik had no idea what Barnum was thinking in his head, he had the sensation that whatever it was involved something exotic. If there was anyone who knew about any and all things exotic, it was the Phantom. Erik looked down at his wife and gave a quick kiss to her forehead. “If you’ll excuse me a moment mon cheri,” He said kindly. “Of course my love,” Rarity nodded. Erik stood to his feet and followed Barnum off to the side, out of earshot of the others. “What can I assist you with my friend?” Erik asked. Phineas sighed for a moment before deciding to tell him the truth. “To be completely honest with you my friend, I lost my job today,” Barnum confessed. “I’m sorry to hear that good sir,” Erik apologized. “Worry not my friend, I have an idea,” Barnum said. “And I need your help to see it through.” “Why ‘my’ help?” “Because from all the tales you told the other night, clearly you are a man who knows the exotic and the odd.” Erik squinted his eyes as he tried to think about where Barnum was going with this. “Continue…” He nodded. “I want to show people a world far beyond anything they have ever seen or heard of in their entire life,” Barnum said excitedly. “If I can show them all the world far beyond their imagination, surely they will pay to see it.” “That’s quite the gamble my friend,” Erik spoke unconvinced. “Speaking from a man who knows what it’s truly like trying to show the world the beauty underneath, the masses tend not to admire what they do not understand.” “That is exactly why you’re just the man to help me!” Barnum exclaimed. “You have seen that world and you want to showcase it just as I do. Separately, we are sure to fail. But together, we have a chance to make history. If nothing else, we do it not for the glory, but for the ones we love most.” Erik sighed as he looked at Barnum and then back at his loving wife and his friends. “What exactly is your plan?” he relented. “Tomorrow, you and I shall go to the bank and apply for a loan,” He informed. “And what will you give with that money?” Barnum looked toward his friend with a bright smile upon his face. “A brighter future…”
Musical MiseryA cool Autumn breeze blew through the night in the magical capital city of Equestria, Canterlot. The streets were full of ponies, of all social classes, all dressed in their fanciest evening wear. They all engaged in small banter as they made their way down the road, all heading for one particular place in mind: Phantasma. Ever since the adventures of the ‘Phantom of the Opera’, the former opera ghost Erik had constructed a colossal opera house right in the heart of Canterlot. This was his sanctuary where he could showcase his musical mastery to the entire world. He had plans to expand his business even further by constructing a theme park, but that was a venture for another day. For tonight, every pony from far and wide came to see the amazing musical stylings of one of the greatest singers in all Equestria: Countess Coloratura… Twilight Sparkle and the rest of the Mane Six all ventured into the grand hall of the Phantasma Opera House, looking around as they admired the grand architecture of the building. When Erik had constructed the opera house, he intended for it to share the many qualities of the Opera Populaire. There were golden statues everywhere, every seat was made of the finest material money could buy, all the walls were decorated in lavish artwork and beautiful trimmings. Needless to say, it was truly a sight to behold for one and all. “WOW-WEE!” Pinkie exclaimed excitedly. “Took the words right outta mah mouth there Pinkie,” Applejack nodded in awe. “Is this really the first time we’ve ever actually been in this opera house?” Fluttershy asked. “It seems that way Flutters,” Rainbow nodded. “Personally, give me a good buck ball game any day of the week.” “Come now hon, we’re here to support Rara’s performance,” Applejack reminded her marefriend. Rainbow rolled her eyes and nodded her head. “Alright,” She groaned. “But you owe me later tonight, no matter how tired we get.” Before their interaction could possibly go any further, the owner of the opera house himself emerged from his office and headed in their direction. Rarity instantly ran to her husband, embracing him in a loving hug. “Ah, my most cherished beauty!” Erik smiled happily. “I am so glad you and the others could attend tonight’s performance.” “As am I my love,” Rarity said, kissing his cheek. “And how’s our ‘little one’ doing?” Erik asked, placing a hoof on her stomach. “Quite well,” Rarity smiled. After their last adventure, in which his wife nearly died, Erik decided to do something special for Rarity and they took a second honeymoon to a lovely tropical island. It was a fantastic two weeks, just the two of them spending time together. About a month of two prior to their return, Rarity begun to act strangely, feeling sudden cravings and getting emotional out of the blue. They went to the doctor to confirm their suspicions and sure enough they were informed they were expecting. Being that Rarity was only three moths along, she wasn’t really ‘showing’ all that much. But soon enough, they could not wait to meet their little darling. “Come everyone, I have our box ready for us,” Erik told everybody. “Box Five?” Rarity asked. “You know me so well…” Every pony followed Erik upstairs to their private box, leading them down to none other than Box Five. Every pony took their seats and waited for the show to begin. Soon enough, the lights in the opera house dimmed and everyone applauded as the curtains were pulled aside. The only one on stage was Countess Coloratura, dressed in a very nice dress. The famous singer stepped out before the audience, giving a bow before she stood back and took a deep breath. Music started to play softly, then she began to sing in that angelic voice only she was capable of providing. When the song finished, the audience stood, clapping and cheering loudly for the singer. Rara had a few tears falling down her face from all the passion she put into her performance, as she bowed for her audience. Many of them even threw flowers onto the stage to showcase their appreciation. The curtain closed as Rara started working her way off the stage. <> Later… After the show was over, Rara was in her dressing room backstage when a sudden knock at the door drew her attention away from the mirror. “Come in!” She called. The door opened as Applejack was the first to enter, followed by the rest of the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik. Seeing her longtime friend since they were campers always made Rara smile and feel at home… in her heart. She stood up from her seat as Applejack walked up and they both embraced. “Y’all were amazing tonight Rara, just as ya always are,” Applejack complimented. “Thank you A.J.,” Rara replied, smiling. “I certainly hope so anyway. I’m always trying to put forth everything I have for my fans.” “Well you certainly succeeded darling,” Rarity spoke up. “You were absolutely mesmerizing to say the least.” “Oh yes, you really were amazing tonight,” Fluttershy agreed. “Amazing?” Pinkie replied. “She was more than amazing. She was more like a combination between wonderful and stupendous. So that means… she was stupenderful!” “Eh… it was alright,” Rainbow shrugged. Applejack gave her marefreind a particularly hard swat on her flank with her tail. The rainbow-haired tomboy leapt with a yelp. “Ow!” She yelled. “What was that for?” “Be nice!” Applejack snipped back. “Ah’m sorry Rara, you’ll have tah forgive mah marefriend. She ain’t too much in the courtesy department.” “It’s alright,” Rara assured her. “I’m just really glad you all came tonight.” “Their words speak true my star,” Erik praised. “You gave an immaculate performance tonight, as you have all other nights since you’ve worked for me.” “I really do appreciate the opportunity you’ve given me sir,” Rara replied. The sound of a great big ‘YAWN!’ caused everyone to turn toward the teenage Spike, who was having a tough time keeping his eyes open… much less standing on his own two feet. “Not to sound rude or nothing, but can we ‘please’ head back home and go to bed?” He asked tiredly. “Oh Spike…” Twilight giggled. “You may be grown, but you’re still that tired baby dragon at heart.” “Hardy-har…” Everyone else laughed as well, but ultimately agreed it ‘was’ getting rather late. Soon as every pony gave their final goodbyes to Rara, congratulating her for a wonderful show, they made their leave for the train station for a well-deserved rest at home. <> The next day… The bright rays of the sun dawned over Ponyville’s blue sky. The birds were all chirping a melody so sweet, as the denizens of the quiet little town went about their daily business. Applejack strolled through tow pulling a cart full of apples behind her, all of which she was fixing to sell. Derick Collins was also walking alongside her, pulling yet another cart along with Big Mac. “Think we have enough to sell or what?” Derick asked sarcastically. “Eeyup!” Big Mac nodded. “We sure do sugar cube,” Applejack responded. “Sellin’ these here apples should help last us a while.” “Not to mention the apple fritters, apple pies, apple dumplings…” Derick listed. “You ponies sure love your apples.” “Ah hush on up now,” Applejack scolded. “Help me set up this cart please.” About a few minutes later, the two ponies had the cart set up and ready for business. “Looks like that’s the end of it,” Derick sighed in relief. “I really should get going. I promised Carried we’d take a night walk down by the pond.” “Oh alright,” Applejack smiled. “Say… how is Carrie by the way?” “Well, she’s been better,” Derick answered. “Poor girl hardly gets out of the house often, usually she just sleeps like she hasn’t slept in years. It’s wonderful being with her, all the same. We’d take our walks everyday and I try to spark up a conversation. But usually it’s just me jabbering like a monkey in a tree… least she listens.” “She’s just been through so much, a girl like her just needs time,” Applejack assured. “As long as she appreciates your company, that’s all that matters.” “Yeah… when you’re right, you’re right.” “Well, go on now. You two love birds have yerselves a good ole time now, ya hear?” “Will do!” Derick nodded. “Later A.J.” Derick soon walked off through town and eventually disappeared around the corner. Applejack smiled after him, remembering the events of their last adventure and everything that young man did to save Carrie White. A man so willing to give up everything he was raised to believe in and all for the girl he loved. It made Applejack and every pony else have real admiration for him. The sound of approaching hooves behind her made her turn around, expecting her first customer of the day. “Sorry y’all, but we ain’t open just…” She instantly stopped herself when she saw it was Rara behind her. The poor singer had huge crocodile tears running down her face and seemed like she was sad beyond belief. “Rara, what happened?” She asked concerned. “Are ya alright?” Rara gave no response but merely just held out a newspaper for Applejack, as she kept sobbing. Applejack grabbed the paper from her friend and began to read its contents. “’Famous singer on her way out the door’?!” She read in shock. “’Countess Coloratura gave a meager, weak performance last night in Canterlot, leaving audiences wondering if her career has finally come to its end’.” Applejack couldn’t help but grow angrier and angrier with every word she read in the newspaper. How dare some kooky critic bash her friend in such a manner? Rara’s performance last night was spectacular beyond words and yet someone had the nerve to slander her? She reeled in her anger as best she could because she knew that her friend needed her right now and she tried to put on a good face. “Ah’m sorry Rara,” She apologized. “Ah can’t imagine how ya must be feelin’ right now.” “Maybe they’re right,” Rara sobbed. “Maybe I have come to the end of my career. Aside from Erik, no pony has booked me to perform in over a year. I guess I’m just no good anymore.” Applejack couldn’t bear it anymore, as she wrapped a hoof around her foal-hood friend trying to calm her down. “Don’t y’all go sayin’ that now,” She said. “Yer an amazin’ singer, one ah the best Equestria has ever had. Ah know fer sure that ah ain’t the only one that thinks so.” “But the reviews…” “Them reviews ain’t nothin’ but a bunch ah phony nonsense,” Applejack assured. “Besides, it’s just ‘one’ critic.” “Oh yeah?” Rara pulled off her saddlebag she strapped on her back and dumped out its contents, of which revealed to be more newspapers from Manehatten, Baltimare, Las Pegasus, and Fillydelphia. Each one of them held the same sort of review from other critics. “Okay, maybe it ‘ain’t’ just one,” Applejack sighed. “But these reviews are a matter of opinion, not facts. They don’t mean nothin’.” “Maybe not for ‘you’ A.J., but it does to me!” Rara responded. “Music is the only thing I’ve ever wanted to do with my life. Ever since I was a filly, I’ve worked hard to become a professional singer and now that it’s all about to come crashing down… I’m so scared! I don’t know what to do… I don’t know what to do!” Applejack couldn’t stand to see her friend so upset. It was true Rara worked hard to get to where she is now. If these sort of things kept happening, sooner or later her career ‘could’ come to an end. Applejack could not… no, wouldnot let that happen to her friend. Thinking on a whim, she knew exactly what needed to be done. “Come with me Rara,” She said. “Ah know ‘exactly’ what we need tah do. Big Mac, hold the fort while we’re gone ya hear?” “Eeyup!” Mac responded simply. Applejack led her friend down the streets of Ponyville to the direction of ‘one’ place that could offer just the solution: Discord’s theatre… <> Later… Applejack assembled the entire Mane Six, including Spike, Rara, and Erik. Once together, they gathered at Discord’s theatre, studying the many different newspapers Rara collected. To say the least, none of them were very happy about it at all. “It’s blasphemy, I tell you!” Erik said angrily. “My star’s a sensational delight upon the stage. How dare these vile cretins?! Having the gall to slander her good name.” “They’re lucky they live pretty far away, or I’d give each of them a piece of my mind!” Rainbow growled. “And a glass of ‘punch’ to wash it all down.” “Okay, okay! We all agree this is a problem,” Twilight agreed. “The question then becomes ‘what’ we should do about it.” “Ain’t it obvious sugar cube?” Applejack asked. She tiled her head a few times, gesturing toward the giant screen the television was hooked up to. To say Twilight was slightly apprehensive about it was an understatement. “I don’t know Applejack,” She answered uncertainly. “Every time we go through the television, we always bring back something bad from wherever we end up.” “Ah come on, they weren’t all ‘that’ bad!” Pinkie spoke up. “Carrie’s been fitting in with us and Rarity’s married to a misunderstood scary musical man… no offense, Erik.” “None taken…” Erik spoke dryly. “My point is…” Twilight continued. “I think we should speak to Princess Celestia about this; perhaps there’s a something she might be able to do about this slander.” “Ah’m tellin’ ya sugar cube if we can just find a place Rara can perform and shine like the star she truly is maybe it can help silence those doubters.” “Maybe Twilight’s right, A.J.,” Rara spoke up. “I’ve seen all the adventures you guys been on and they seem pretty dangerous. I think it’s just time to admit that I’ve come to the end of my rope and at least retire in peace. I have an uncle who runs a shoe factory…” “Nuh-uh! Ah ain’t lettin’ ya do that Rara,” Applejack spoke determined. “Ya said so yerself, singin’ is all ya ever wanted tah do with yer life. Ya give it up now, yer just provin’ them critics right about ya.” Rara sighed to herself, but she knew deep in her heart Applejack was absolutely right. This had been her dream since she was a foal, she couldn’t just throw it all away just because some ponies told her to. Anything in life that means anything must be worth fighting for. “You know I swear this whole scenario feels ‘familiar’ for some reason…” Pinkie pondered, scratching her head. “Now where have I heard this plot before?” “If we’re going to help Rara, how would we do it?” Fluttershy asked. Twilight thought over the notion for a moment before an imaginary lightbulb went off in her head. Approaching the television, she reached under the stand it sat upon and proceeded to pull out some weird device connected to the television. Soon she reapproached the group waiting anxiously. “Celestia, Storm, and I have been working on this the past couple months,” Twilight informed. “I think it might be time to give it a test.” “Now?” Rainbow asked, raising a brow. “What is it, Twi?” Spike asked, observing the device. “Looks like some weird robotic headgear.” “Ooh, I love robots!” Pinkie squealed gleefully. “Especially the ones from that movie we’ll be doing in the future… oh, wait a minute! Wasn’t supposed to give that away… pretend you didn’t hear that. Heh-heh… my bad.” Everyone looked at Pinkie before shaking their heads and ignoring her strange comments. “Well basically, we assembled this device to hook up to a pony’s subconscious and delve deep into the recesses of their minds to where their cognitive…” “UGH! Can we please skip the egghead talk?” Rainbow asked irritated. “And maybe explain it like we’re two years old?!” Twilight glared at her for a moment before releasing a deep sigh. “Basically… you put it on your head, think of what you want most, and it’ll open the portal,” Twilight spoke deadpanned. “Thank you!” Rainbow smirked. Twilight approached Rara and though she spoke no words, Rara instantly knew what to do. She bowed her head, allowing Twilight to hook up the device around her head. “Now I want you to relax and think of what you want most in this world,” Twilight instructed. Releasing a deep exhale and shutting her eyes, Rara cleared her mind and focused on the one thing she wanted more than anything. A strange humming sound emanated from the device, as an electrical surge raced through the cord attached to it and traversed along the television. Every pony watched in shock as the portal opened and Rara opened her eyes as Twilight removed the device from her head. The Mane Six, Spike, and Rara gathered around the portal and made to step inside. “Wait!” Everyone froze and turned toward Erik, who approached their side. “If you’re venturing off on this quest, I’m coming along as well,” He said. “Are you quite certain of that darling?” Rarity asked. “It could very well be dangerous.” “All the more reason to accompany you,” Erik responded. “I refuse to let you venture off on your own where anything could happen to you… or our child. I swore to protect and love you for the rest of my days, and I’m going along with you one way or the other.” Rarity smiled at her husband, sincerely touched over how he truly cared so much for her and their child that he would go along with them just to keep them safe. Rarity leaned forward and kissed her husband earnestly before they both looked toward the portal. Every pony took a deep breath before taking a step forward and walking through the portal together. They had no idea what this adventure would entail, but they were determined to get through it together just as they always have.
P.T. BarnumAuthor's Note If you all are looking for the full lyrics to the songs in this story, you may find them in the story on Wattpad or wait for Phantom Dragons commentaries that will also have them in them. Meanwhile, I hope that you all enjoy this new chapter. P.T. Barnum A strong wind blew through the air as the crystal portal opened up and the Mane Six, along with Spike, Rara, and Erik stepped through to the other side. The moment they all stepped out, the portal closed up behind them leaving them all in this new world that they had stepped into. Looking about their new surroundings, they all noticed they seemed to be standing inside of a small apartment from the looks of it. It was a relatively small and dark living space with a few candles lit around the entire place. There was a leak in the roof with droplets of water falling down into a cast iron pot on the floor. To say the least, it seemed like a crummy place to call home. “What a dump!” Rainbow remarked. “Is this what ya were picturin’ in yer head?” Applejack asked her friend. “Not exactly,” Rara responded. “I was picturing a place where I would be able to sing and shine like I once did.” “And this is where it sent us?” Spike asked, disappointed. “A rundown old apartment?” “I don’t think it’s all bad,” Pinkie smiled. “Just needs a bit of sprucing up here and there. You know maybe some new wallpaper and some carpets. You know I was thinking maybe something more modern contempt, something really sheik and fresh you know?” Every pony and Spike all looked at Pinkie with quirked eyebrows as the pink party pony just shrugged and giggled happily to herself. “Do I really sound like that when I speak?” Rarity asked. “I swear the more Pinkie speaks, the less and less sense comes out,” Erik commented. He looked down toward his wife, who stared wide-eyed at him almost in shock. He was about to question ‘why’ she was staring in such a manner until he realized how diminutive she was next to him. Looking down at himself, he was surprised to discover he no longer had hooves, but hands. He had once again assumed human form much to everyone’s amazement. However, it clearly was not the same form he had when he departed from France. “Oh my goodness!” Fluttershy gasped. “You said it Flutters,” Rainbow agreed. “Erik darling, you look… different,” Rarity spoke, in shock. “Honestly I prefer Ramin Karimloo’s version of him better,” Pinkie added. “No offense to Gerald Butler fans.” Erik ran a hand over his face where his mask resided as it always did. A horrid thought came to him. If he had retaken a human form, did that meant he was disfigured yet again? He noticed a small hand mirror on a table close by and quickly scrambled over to pick it up. Holding it up to look upon his face, he slowly and shakily reached up to remove his mask, fearing what horrors lied beneath. Removing his mask from his face, he shut his eyes tightly before slowly opening them again. To his great relief there was no deformity at all, all that stared back at him was a handsome face. “Thank God I heaven,” He sighed in relief. Erik rejoined his wife, along with her friends, as they tried to make heads or tails of this. “Why has Erik taken a human form and not us?” Rarity wondered. “I think it has something to do with the fact he was human originally,” Twilight theorized. “Seeing as how we’re probably in another human world, it would only make sense Erik would retake his original form.” “That certainly sparks a ton of questions from our previous adventures,” Pinkie replied. While in discussion, Spike approached the lone window in the room they were currently occupying, looking toward the streets below. Hundreds of people walked the streets, all of them dressed in old-fashioned clothing. A number of carriages were also being pulled along the streets by horses. It was safe to say they were not in a modern day human world. The question then became where exactly they were. The sudden sound of a door swinging open made every freeze in place and turn toward a man, a woman, and two small children entering the apartment. The man himself was as tall as Erik, with dark brown hair and matching sideburns. The woman beside him was rather beautiful with blonde hair that went down her shoulders. The two little girls with them didn’t even seem like they were past the age of ten, one of them was the spitting image of their father with brown hair and the other resembled their mother with blonde hair. The family all froze in place when they noticed the colorful ponies, the teenage dragon, and the former opera ghost standing in the midst of their home. “What are you all doing in my house?” The man asked. “Who are you?” The woman asked fearfully. “If you’ve come to rob us, we have nothing to give you.” “No, no, no, it’s not what you think!” Twilight assured quickly. “We aren’t here to rob or hurt you.” The two parents gasped upon hearing the purple alicorn speak, except the two young girls who both stared at the group in wonder. “Stay back or I will get the police!” The man warned them. “Please sir, just give us the opportunity to explain.” “… And that pretty much sums it up.” After the initial shock of multi-colored talking ponies in their home, the family originally wanted to run and find the police to deal with this matter. However, the father found himself rather intrigued with them as did the two girls and even eventually the mother. They allowed them to explain their story to them for the past few hours, all listening intently, and with amazed looks upon their faces any doubt they had about these new visitors had vanished. “That’s certainly quite the story,” The man spoke, amazed. “A magical device that takes you to many different worlds. Almost seems impossible to believe.” “Buddy, you’re speaking with talking ponies, Pegasi, unicorns, and even a dragon,” Rainbow commented. “Impossible is pretty hard to believe at this point.” The father himself chuckled at her statement as he nodded his head in affirmatio. “It would certainly seem that way,” He agreed. “Where are my manners? I haven’t bothered to introduce myself or my family. My name’s Phineas Taylor Barnum, and this is my wife Charity and our two daughters Caroline and Helen.” “Pleasure to make your acquaintance,” Charity greeted kindly. “It’s really nice to meet you all as well,” Twilight smiled. “My name is Twilight Sparkle. These are my friends Rainbow Dash, Applejack, Fluttershy, Pinkie Pie, Spike, Rara, and Erik.” All the ponies and Spike smiled and waved toward Barnum and his family, while Erik gave a courteous bow. “Wow, you all sound really amazing,” Caroline smiled with glee. “Did you really do all those things you talked about?” Helen asked curiously. “Yer dang tootin’ there little lady,” Applejack nodded. “That’s right,” Rainbow agreed. “We’ve fought witches, wizards, monsters, giants, and even ghosts.” “Sounds amazing!” Charity said amazed. “Like something straight from a book of fairy tales.” “It sure does, doesn’t it?” Twilight agreed. “Anyway, now that we’re all introduced, why not tell us about yourselves?” Barnum and Charity looked toward each other with a smile before turning back to the Equestria group. “Very well,” Barnum agreed. “It all started many years ago, when my father took me to Charity’s home for business…” <> (Flashback): A young Phineas Barnum stood outside a tailor shop as he stared through the display window toward a very fancy-looking red coat and a top hat. Having grown up poor for most of his life, he was not able to enjoy the finer things in life. His father worked as a tailor, but a job such as that did not always provide very much money. This was evident as he looked down at his worn down shoes that were falling apart at the seams with his toes sticking right out the front. Looking back toward the store, he imagined someday having a wonderful life filled with glory and riches. These thoughts were interrupted the moment his father, Philo Barnum, departed the shop. “I understand, yes,” He informed the shopkeeper. “Thank you so much, Mr. Jeffries. Thank you. You’ll have the money by the end of the day.” He grabbed Phineas and pulled him down the street. “Let’s go,” He instructed. Phineas stopped and looked back toward the shop one last time when the sound of a train whistle blew through the air. “Phineas, hurry up!” Philo urged his son. “We’re going to miss the train.” Phineas and his father hopped aboard the train that took them to the other side of Connecticut, where they had business to attend at the Hallet manor. Walking down the road to the manor, Phineas and his father carried their material and supplies needed for tailoring. As they neared the front door, Philo looked down toward his son. “Stand up straight,” He instructed. “Wipe that muck off.” Fixing his appearance, Phineas and Philo made their way toward the manor where they were directed toward the sitting room by the master of the house, Mr. Hallet. While Philo aided Mr. Hallet with tailoring his new suit, Phineas was focused on something else entirely. For sitting across the room at the grand dining table was a young girl about his age with blonde hair wearing a lovely blue dress. The young Charity was given etiquette lessons like a proper young lady, all while sneaking glances toward Phineas. The young Barnum decided to try and make her laugh as he picked up a small wooden dish beside him and placed a winder into the little hole on the top. Placing a small scrap of parchment paper into the cup, he stared back toward Charity and pretended he was sipping a teacup. Charity looked at him curiously as Phineas sucked the paper to his mouth in a rather humorous fashion. This caused Charity to do a spit take, spilling her tea all over her blue dress and they both laughed. “Charity, come here!” Mr. Hallet spoke sternly. Charity approached her father, who looked with such disappointment on his face. “Your dress!” He pointed out. “Is this how we’ve taught you to behave?” Charity looked toward the ground in shame and poor Phineas couldn’t bear to see her scolded for something he caused. It was then he decided to step into the conversation. “It’s my fault sir,” He confessed. “I made her laugh.” Mr. Hallet approached Phineas and stared him down with a blank expressionless face. “Well… thank you for your honesty,” He said. *SLAP!!!* Everyone gasped as Mr. Hallet whacked poor young Phineas right across the face and scowled at him. “Stay away from my daughter,” He ordered. Mr. Hallet walked away as he grabbed Charity by the wrist and yanked her after him. All the while Charity looked back at Phineas feeling really bad about what her father had done to him. Phineas looked back at her as well and was feeling both humiliated and also regretful for getting Charity into trouble. <> Later that same day, the sun was setting over the ocean as Phineas at down by the beach and just looked out across the water. The sound of footsteps caused him to look behind him and spot Charity approaching him to sit along the sand. “How’d you get out?” He asked her. “The window,” Charity responded. “Father is sending me to finishing school. I don’t know what the future will be.” Phineas looked back at her as a smile spread its way onto his lips. “I do,” He said. Focusing solely on each other, though having only just met, Phineas and Charity both knew what this meant as the young boy began to sing. <> Soon as the story ended, many of the ponies and Spike had teary eyes at hearing such a romantic story. To think Phineas and Charity defied the odds and came together despite Charity’s parents being against the idea. Now here they were: Happily married with two beautiful little girls. The very thought made Erik wrap his arm around his now much smaller wife and placed a gentle hand upon her stomach. Rarity smiled at him, placing her hoof over his hand as the pair imagined just exactly the same sort of future for them and their child. “That sure was a very lovely tale,” Twilight smiled. “I’m only sorry Mr. and Mrs. Hallet didn’t approve of you, Mr. Barnum.” “Don’t worry about them none,” Phineas scoffed. “We stopped caring about what they think a long time ago. This is the life Cherry and I decided to build for ourselves. Nothing is going to change that.” The two parents smiled at one another before sharing a quick kiss and pulled their little daughters close to them. “We really appreciate you not bringing the cops in,” Rara spoke appreciatively. “But I think it’s about time we try finding some place to lay our heads for the night.” The Equestria group stood up and started their way towards the door when Barnum quickly stood up. “Oh now we can’t in good conscious let you go out with no place to sleep,” He told them. “If you’d like, you’re more than welcome to stay here with us. It may be a little craped, but we can make due.” The group turned back toward the Barnum’s with appreciative smiles. “You sure we won’t be a bother?” Rarity asked. “None at all,” Charity spoke up. “You all seem like very lovely folk, surely we can’t send you out into the streets. So it’s decided, you’ll stay here with us.” “How can we possibly say ‘no’ to that offer?” Spike responded. “Simply put, you can’t,” Barnum joked. Everyone laughed at Phineas’ joke as they gathered together in the living room to talk some more. While the group continued conversing, Rara stayed behind as she approached the window to gaze out toward the evening sky. A gentle hoof came over her shoulder and she turned toward Applejack, who eyed her with great concern. “Ah know yer worried Rara,” Applejack told her. “But ah promise you, everything will work out in the end. We’ll find a way tah get ya the recognition ya deserve and there ain’t nothin’ and no one that’ll ever doubt you again.” Rara took a deep breath, as she returned her gaze back out the window. “I really hope you’re right A.J.,” Rara spoke softly. “I really do.”
A Genius IdeaAuthor's Note Again if you want to see the full version of the chapter with lyrics included, you can find it on Wattpad A Genius Idea The very next day, Barnum and Erik arose bright and early before anyone else. Together, they made their way to the local bank where they both now sat waiting to speak with the bank director. Erik still felt uncertain about this little endeavor that Barnum concocted due to the unpredictability that it held. Then again, had he listened to those very same doubts back when he was still caged up and advertised as the ‘Devil’s Child’, he’d never have risen to the heights he was at now. For the moment, Erik was willing to help Barnum with his grand scheme. He only hoped that he would not regret it down the road. There they both sat upon the long bench, along with a bunch of other gentlemen waiting to see the director. “I hope you’re correct about this,” Erik sighed. “Trust me my friend,” Barnum assured. “This willwork for all of us.” “’The goat prices go up, so the pork bellies go down’…” Barnum turned toward the bench to someone reading a newspaper. He noticed a pair of legs that barely even folded down over the bench. Whoever this person was, clearly they were quite short. The door to the director’s office swung open and a middle-aged woman walked out looking less than pleased. “Charles, we’re leaving!” She spoke agitated. “This bank only wants to lend money to people ‘with’ money.” No sooner she spoke when the person holding the newspaper put it down to reveal a dwarf of a man who hopped off the bench and followed his mother. While walking, he noticed Phineas looking at him in amazement and gave him in turn a dirty look. “What are you looking at, flop-doodle?” He insulted. Barnum merely watched as the two left, with a look of complete awe. Not only that, but so too was Erik, who watched the two walk away. He’d seen his fair share of dwarves back when he worked in the circus. Many of them, like all the others, who beat and humiliated him. And yet there were a select few who were actually kind to him, even making sure he was fed… specifically ‘one’ dwarf. Both of their thoughts were disrupted the moment the bank director called out to them. “Mr. Barnum.” Both men stood up and made their way toward the director’s office, but not before a big burly man stood before Erik. “I believe Mr. Koffman called for Mr. Barnum, not you,” He spoke sternly. “Worry not sir,” Barnum quickly interjected. “He’s my business partner.” The guard studied Erik up and down before stepping off to the side, allowing Erik and Barnum to enter Mr. Koffman’s office. Both of them took a seat before Koffman’s desk and the bank director looked at them expectantly. “Now then, what is it that you wish to inquire about today?” He asked them. “Well sir, my business partner and myself would like to inquire about receiving a ten thousand dollar lone,” Barnum informed flat out. Koffman released a chuckle and wiped a lone tear that threatened to escape from his eye. “Surely you can’t be serious,” He said. “We are gravely serious good monsieur,” Erik replied. “We seek to use this money to invest in a place where men, women, and children of all ages may experience the unnatural and bizarre in a way they’ve never have before.” “This venture you propose is risky and somewhat bizarre,” Koffman responded uncertainly. “It is a good best is what it is, sir,” Barnum assured. “People don’t want to admit it, but they’re fascinated with the exotic and the macabre. It’s why we stare at it.” Koffman looked between both men, studying their intentions before sighing to himself with a shake of his head. “The bank is going to need substantial collateral,” He told them. “Of course. I, uh—I wouldn’t suggest otherwise,” Barnum replied. The man himself reached deep in his coat pocket, drawing out a little pamphlet which he hands to the bank director himself. “The deed and title to my entire flotilla of trading vessels.” Erik reached into his own coat pocket and handed another piece of paper. “As well as the deed to my opera house,” He said. Barnum looked toward Erik with confusion, wondering why he would want to put his own opera house for collateral. However, a single knowing look from the Phantom made the smile return to Barnum’s face as they both faced Koffman once more. “I believe this will be more than enough collateral,” Barnum smirked. Koffman gave no word and merely grabbed the loan request to which he applied the stamp of approval. <> Later that very same day, Barnum and Erik led Charity, the girls, and the rest of the Equestrians down the street towards what they hoped would be their ticket to the finer life. Following their incursion to the bank earlier, Barnum asked Erik to retrieve the girls and Spike while he used to money for the investment that was needed. Erik really put all his trust in Phineas Barnum, he only hoped he wouldn’t make him regret it or else he’d make sure that he did. Eventually, the group met with Phineas, who helped to escort them down the road. “I hope you all are ready to see this,” He said excitedly. “I still don’t understand dear,” Charity said confused. “Why would a bank loan us $10,000?” “Because we put up collateral.” “But dear, we don’t have any collateral.” “Sure we do,” Barnum retorted. “In the South China Seas.” “In the South China Seas?” Charity questioned. “Deep in the South China Seas,” Barnum chuckled. “That’s really great for you and all, no disrespect or anything, but what does any of that have to do with us?” Rainbow asked. “Because your ‘phantom’ friend is going to be my business partner,” Barnum replied, referring to Erik. The girls and Spike faced Erik with raised eyebrows, but none higher than Rarity. “So… you decided to venture off on a business acquisition and you didn’t think to tell me?” Rarity asked. “Believe me mon ange, the matter is far more complicated than that,” Erik responded. “How so?” Erik gestured her to come closer, whispering the truth of everything in her ear. After hearing it, she looked over Barnum almost with a look of sorrow and pity in her eyes. “How horrible…” She whispered. “Indeed,” Erik nodded. “I hope you know what you are doing,” Rarity spoke, with a headshake. “How did you end up tied to this in the first place?” “Barnum put his sunken ships as collateral, and I put up my opera house.” “WHAT?!?!” Rarity yelled. The shout was so loud it made everyone freeze and look toward them in shock. This, of course, made Rarity blush furiously in embarrassment. “Sorry everyone,” She apologized. Barnum and his family merely shrugged, as they continued down the road while the Mane Six, Rara, and Spike came over to join in on their conversation. “What’s wrong Rarity?” Twilight asked. “Apparently my husband informed me that he put up his own opera house as collateral for this little business venture,” Rarity replied, slightly upset. “Now why would ya go and do somethin’ like that Erik?” Applejack asked. “I’ve done some dumb things in my life, but never anything that ‘stupid’,” Rainbow added. “Relax everyone,” Erik assured. “You truly think I’d do something like that wihtout having a trick up my sleeve?” This caused everyone to look at him more confused than ever. “What do you mean?” Fluttershy asked. “I gave him the ‘deed’, but never said it was the real one,” Erik smiled mischievously. “I’ve kept dozens of copies of the deed to my opera house back in Paris. So even if this venture fails, it will be quite difficult for them to seize my property… when it technically doesn’t exist to them.” “Erick that’s… actually really smart!” Twilight spoke amazed. “Yeah, it does make sense!” Spike agreed. Though she was still quite peeved he didn’t tell her of his plan, Rarity smiled as Erik knelt down and they both shared an embrace and a kiss. “I must admit my dearest, that was quite the ruse,” She spoke with admiration. “And what did we buy with this loan?” Charity asked. The group finally reached the end of the road where a big building stood, recently refurbished and now with a large banner hanging out front. “’Barnum’s American Museum of Curiosities’,” Barnum read with pride. “What kind of museum is it?” Rara asked. “A place to be transported,” Barnum answered. “A place where people can see things they’ve never seen before.” <> “Wax figures?” Inside the museum, everyone stood around looking in confusion at the sight of many different wax figures of historical figures. There were also figures of animals, one person beheaded by a guillotine, and various other weird and rather ‘unentertaining’ subjects. “Yeah…” Barnum nodded, leading the tour. “They’re all the rage in Europe. Look, Marie Antoinette with the sore throat. Napoleon. Come here. See? You’ve already met some of the most famous folks in history. But they’re not all wax.” He led the group toward a man standing off the side wearing a dirty worn outfit. He had a thick pushy beard and wore a bowler hat over his head. He was a mangy looking man, who made everyone slightly nervous. “This is the great… O’Malley,” Barnum introduced. “Master of sleight of hand. A king of deception.” “Hmm… you don’t look like a magician,” Pinkie spoke, confused. “Where’s your cape? Your magic wand? And that cute little rabbit you pull out of a hat?” O’Malley just looked toward her with a bored blank expression. “I’m a thief,” He spoke flatly. “A very ‘good’ thief,” Barnum smiled. “I caught him nicking my watch.” And you thought it would be a good idea to hire him instead of calling the police?” Erik asked. To which Barnum just shrugged in response. Just then, the two little girls caught sight of something that made them gasp in amazement. “An elephant!” They exclaimed excitedly. “Not just any elephant,” Barnum spoke, leading them. “Oh, yeah. This is a ten-ton bull straight from the plains of Africa. And look at that.” He pointed to the side where a gigantic stuffed giraffe looked upon them from a great height. “The tallest giraffe in the world.” “Can I climb up its leg?” Caroline asked hopefully. “Absolutely not.” “Cuz nothing says, ‘Come in and have a good time’ like sore throats, beheadings, and big animals," Rainbow spoke sarcastically. "Hush up now," Applejack scolded her. “Okay… I know how it looks,” Barnum spoke nervously. “If you didn’t, I’d be worried,” Charity chuckled. “I mean, it just needs a little work, but…” “The loan has to be paid back every month.” “Oh yeah, we’re gonna pay it,” Barnum spoke determined. “We just need customers. Hundreds of them. We’re gonna get them.” <> Later on, Barnum and his family were busy advertising for the museum. The girls and Spike already decided to head back to the apartment so they wouldn’t get in the way. Not that they really thought that the business was going to succeed because quite frankly it seemed rather… boring. “Welcome to the Barnum Museum!” Barnum announced to the people. “It is one hour of your time, sir, but it will change your life.” “We have shows on the hour, every hour!” Charity added. “I love your dress,” Caroline complimented a passing woman. “Surely not for the faint of heart, but I can tell you’re gonna love it,” Barnum continued. “Half price for anyone who’s wearing a hat. Ho, ho! That’s you, sir.” However, it quickly became apparent that no one was interested as they threw the fliers on the ground and walked all over them. “Loads of garbage.” “Goodness, no. It’s rubbish.” Seeing the people walk away and throwing their advertisements away made Barnum extremely nervous. He quickly raced to the ticket booth O’Malley was working and looked toward the thief. “How many tickets?” He asked. “Three,” O’Malley answered flatly. Barnum turned around toward his wife and two girls standing there holding three tickets, the only three tickets that had been sold at all. Barnum sighed in disappointment over the fact this clearly was not going well. <> Later that night, Barnum came home for the evening following a long, uneventful day at the museum. Charity and the girls had already gone home long ago, following hours upon hours of absolutely no business. Barnum walked through the front door, finding his wife sleeping on the couch and Fluttershy gently laying a blanket over her while she slept. Barnum gave a small nod of gratitude toward the little Pegasus for taking care of his wife as he walked over and knelt beside her. At that moment, the rest of the Mane Six, Rara, Spike, and Erik approached to greet him. “How did the rest of the day go?” Twilight asked. “Got any more business?” Spike added hopefully. Barnum looked toward them and just gave a sad shake of his head. “Aww don’t beat yourself up just yet,” Pinkie smiled. “Tomorrow’s a brand new day. I’m sure it’ll be filled with nothing but sunshine and new adventures.” “No offense Pinkie, but you think that ‘every’ day,” Rainbow said. “At least she’s thinking positively darling,” Rarity shot at her. “Daddy.” The sounds of his daughters calling for him spread a smile across Phineas’s face, as he walked into their room with the ponies, Spike, and Erik following closely behind. Both Caroline and Helen lay snug in their beds as the group walked in and smiled at them. “Ah thought we done put y’all two tah bed an hour ago,” Applejack chuckled. “We wanted to make sure daddy got home safely,” Helen replied. “Did you sell any more tickets today?” Caroline asked her father. “A few, yeah,” Phineas nodded. “Most everyone was rushing home, it’s Friday, but… we sold a few.” “I think you have too many dead things in your museum, Daddy,” Caroline spoke honestly. This made everyone chuckle over how brutally honest this little girl could be. “Do you?” Phineas chuckled. “She’s right,” Rara agreed. “You need something alive. Something amazing beyond words that people will pay to see.” “Honestly, I don’t think people want to pay to stare at dead things,” Rainbow added. “I wouldn’t.” This again garnered another chuckle from Phineas Barnum, who looked down toward his daughters with a loving smile. “I’ll see what I can do,” He told them. “Go to sleep, both of you.” “Something sensational,” Caroline replied. “That’s a big word.” “It’s your word.” “Something that isn’t stuffed,” Helen added. Soon Barnum and the Equestrian group made their way from the bedroom and back into the living room. “Those girls really are smart beyond their years,” Twilight marveled. “They know what the show needs,” Erik nodded. “It needs spectacles, living and breathing. Things that make people drop their jaws in disbelief, but they’ll keep coming back anyway. I must admit, though my time was horrific, people from all around flocked at the chance to see myself and all the other acts at the fair… because this was how we make our living.” “Yeah, but where would you find any of those?” Rainbow asked. All of a sudden, Phineas’ face lit up as another idea came to his head. Slowly turning back around, he looked toward the pony bunch and their dragon companion. Kneeling to their height, he looked at them all dead in the eye. “Kind of like all of you,” He said. “What do you mean darling?” Rarity asked. “How would all of you like to be in my show?” He asked them. “Um… don’t you think it might be weird for people to see a bunch of colorful talking ponies?” Rara asked. “And… a talking dragon?” Spike pointed at himself. “That’s the whole point of my show,” Barnum replied. “To show people fascinating and exciting things they have never seen before. With all of you at my side, I have no doubt in my mind that everyone will pay to see the show.” The ponies and Spike looked back and forth at one another as they thought about his proposal. On one hand, it was risky exposing themselves in a place where they have no idea how the people would react. Then again, that certainly never stopped them on many of their adventures and somehow it all worked out fine. Also, they’d hate to see their new friends out on the streets, so the answer overall was not difficult to think about. “We’re in Mr. Barnum,” Twilight agreed. She held out her hoof, to which Phineas greatly accepted and shook. “Okay, you have colorful ponies and a teenage dragon,” Rainbow pointed out. “I still think you need a bit more to keep people interesting.” Thinking about where to possibly find more acts for his new show, Phineas smiled again as he recalled something from earlier that day. “I think I know just who to talk to…” <> The next day, Phineas found himself walking up the front door of Gertrude Stratton. After seeing her and her son leaving the bank yesterday, he knew right away Charles was exactly what was needed for his show. Reaching the front door, he gave a gentle knock and Ms. Stratton answered not even a minute later. She was rather confused seeing some random man at her door. “You must be Gertrude Stratton,” Phineas smiled. “I’m looking for your son.” “I don’t have a son,” She replied. “The hospital record says you do. Charles, right? Age 22?” “Look here sir, my son already has enough people who want to make him feel smaller than he already is, and I really don’t…” “Please miss, I don’t wish any harm on you or your son,” Phineas assured. “I only require a few minutes of his time to offer him an amazing opportunity.” Though Ms. Stratton clearly did not trust the man, she stepped aside and allowed him entry before leading him to the living area. “Charles!” She called. “Charles!” The sound of a door unlocking was heard before it opened to reveal the diminutive Charles Stratton who walked into the room. Upon seeing Phineas Barnum looking at him with a smile, the small man grumbled. Nonetheless, Phineas knelt down to his height. “P.T. Barnum, at your service,” He greeted. “I am putting together a show and I need a star.” “You want people to laugh at me,” Charles grumbled. “Well, they’re laughing anyway, kid, so might as well get paid,” Barnum joked. “I see a soldier, no, a general riding across the stage with a sword and a gun, and—and—and the most beautiful uniform ever seen.” Charles just looked at Barnum like he was crazy, yet Phineas kept a complete straight face. “People will come from all over the world, and when they do they will not laugh… they’ll salute,” He promised. “How do I know that I can trust you?” Charles asked. “You can’t,” Phineas responded. “But what do you have to lose.” “I’m not like everyone else,” Charles spoke sadly. To which Phineas responded with a smile. “No one ever made a difference by being like everyone else.” This caused Charles to smile and stick out his tiny hand to which Barnum shook. <> Across town, Erik and Rarity assisted with looking for acts for the show. With Barnum looking for Charles Stratton, Erik promised he’d help him find exactly what he needed. After all, they were business partners and if this endeavor was to work, they needed to work together. So for right now, they were putting up fliers across town as they scoured the area for acts. All of a sudden, some man from across the way cleared his throat and got the former Phantom’s attention. “Hey!” He called. “You looking for freaks? I know where you can find one of them.” “Where?” He asked. “Cross the way you’ll find a laundry house,” The man informed. “There’ll be a woman who works there. Real freak of nature that one. If you ask me, shoulda put her in a madhouse at birth.” The man let out a laugh which made Erik fume with rage. Those were exactly the same sort of things people used to say of him when he was caged like an animal at the fair all those years ago. Those sort of things are what drove him to madness. Looking down toward his wife at his side, he could also see she was angry as well. Insulting people simply for being different from everyone was one thing she could not stand. Looking up at her husband, she only gave him a curt nod and he nodded back. Reeling back he unloaded a powerful shot to the side of the man’s face and knocked him out cold. Rubbing his now sore knuckles, he and Rarity walked off to where he had told them about. After walking a few blocks, they finally found the laundry house and walked inside. The moment they did, they could instantly hear a melodious harmony throughout the entire establishment. Walking into the cleaning area, they found many women washing sheets and other clothing. One woman walked up to him, to which Erik bowed his head. “Hello,” He greeted. “Sir, you shouldn’t be here,” The woman said. “My apologies. I was just passing by, and I wanted to know who was singing.” All at once, the singing stopped, and Erik turned over to a woman peeking over a freshly cleaned hanging sheet. When she noticed him looking at her, she quickly ducked back down. “It’s you, isn’t it?” Erik approached her. “Sir, I’ll have to ask you to leave,” She spoke quietly. “You are so talented, blessed…” When Erik pulled back the sheet to look upon her, both he and Rarity looked rather shocked by what they saw. For the woman, Lettie Lutz, was no ordinary woman. She had all the qualities of a woman, but the major difference was the thick bushy beard that went down her face. The sight was truly one to behold, as they both stared at her, which made the poor woman feel completely self-conscious. “Extraordinary!” Erik marveled. “Unique… I’d even say ‘beautiful’.” This caused most of the women in the area to chuckle, to which only made Lettie feel even worse about her appearance. “Sir, please leave me alone,” She nearly begged. “They don’t understand now, but they will,” Erik assured her. “How can you look at me and not turn away?” “Darling, if I was truly ‘that’ heartless,” Rarity spoke up. “I would never have married my husband here.” Lettie looked down toward the miniscule marshmallow unicorn standing next to the tall brooding ‘opera ghost’. Looking between the two, she couldn’t help but be confused. On one hand, the talking unicorn was strange enough… but it is the choice of words she said which proved all the more confusing. “Your… husband?” She asked. “Yes, I know it must seem very confusing and let me tell you that’s quite the long story,” Rarity said. “Anyway, the point is my husband Erik was treated as an outcast at a young age simply due to his appearance. Why they even kept him in a cage as part of a freak show where he was constantly humiliated.” “It’s true…” Erik nodded. “Why?” Lettie questioned. “There’s nothing wrong with him.” “You only see my ‘new’ form dear woman,” Erik replied. “Rarity, I’d like you to show her what I truly am… or was…” “Are you quite certain dear?” Rarity asked unsure. Erik only gave a light nod and knelt to her side, silently granting her permission. Rarity took a deep breath and lit her horn with a magic aura before touching it toward the side of her husband’s face. The moment Erik stood back up, facing Lettie, she was surprised when she saw his now deformed face. “See? I’m not so unlike yourself,” Erik spoke. “I was born with this deformity that caused my own mother to fear and hate me. When I was a boy, she sold me to a traveling fair where I was locked in a cage and beaten daily. I was presented as ‘the Devil’s Child’, and the people would laugh and scorn at me for years…” Lettie glanced toward the deformed man for a few moments before Rarity used her magic to shift his face back to normal once more. “Not only did he start at the bottom,” Rarity added. “But he had a fiery passion and a voice that could rival the world’s greatest Opera singers.” “Wait… what?” Lettie asked. “When he performed on that stage, he had audiences so captivated that they could never look away. When they heard his voice, they all felt like they were entranced. He was so magnificent; he stole my heart the day I first met him.” “What are you trying to say?” “I’m saying, we see a spark in you waiting to burn into a fiery inferno!” Rarity continued. “When I look at you, I see a person with passion, much like my beloved husband Erik.” “Do you truly believe I have such a passion in me?” Lettie asked. “We do…” Erik smiled. <> Soon the news was spread far across the town, as fliers and posters were made at every corner. All promoting the same message: ‘WANTED! UNIQUE PERSONS! CURIOSITIES! DARING ACTS! WONDERS OF THE WORLD!’. An open invitation for those who consider themselves different from the normal world to come meet at Barnum’s American Museum, for a chance to turn their oddities into marvels. It wasn’t long before several of those wonders in question stumbled upon those notes and while hesitant at first they still decided to take that chance. All of the strangest beings known to man were soon lining up to ‘apply’ for Barnum’s museum, all coming in a vast variety of appearances. From a man with hair all over his body, to one who stood as tall as the mountains themselves. There was a portly man with a rather queer personality and a woman with curly hair as white as snow. So many unique types of people hoping to offer something life-changing with this opportunity. By this point, Barnum and Erik were in the midst of an interview with a pair of African-American siblings. “Okay… Anne and W.D. Wheeler,” Phineas noted. “Brother and sister?” “Yes, sir,” Anne answered. “Terrific!” Erik marveled. “And what do you do?” “Trapeze.” “Trapeze… okay,” Erik nodded. “You know, people aren’t gonna like it,” W.D. spoke up. “If you put us on the stage.” “Oh, I’m counting on it,” Barnum assured confidently. “So… when can you start?” Erik asked. And with every act accepted into his museum, the girls, along with Spike, immediately went to work on the posters to promote each act Barnum brought in. For he knew with all these promising acts, they were sure to make the money they’d need to not only pay off the loan by the end of the month… but to indeed reach for that future beyond Barnum’s wildest dreams. And the hiring of the Wheeler siblings was not the end of it… <> “Is this over… your…” Phineas gestured. “Entire body…” The tattooed man confirmed. “Terrific!” Erik replied. “We don’t need to see it.” <> “Now.” The ‘Dog Boy’ pounced onto the top of the table, which made Barnum and Erik laugh with excitement. No other words were enough to describe this marvelous act before their eyes. They knew right then and there that this young man would be perfect for the museum. “You… are… hired!” Erik applauded. <> “Can I ask how heavy you are?” Barnum asked the portly man. “Do you have a number for that?” “I prefer not to say, but…” The portly man began. “Just between us,” Erik assured. “500 pounds…” The man whispered. “750 pounds, you said?” Barnum smiled. “750 pounds, it is!” The man giggled. <> “What is your name?” Barnum asked the tall man. “Vasily Palvos, sir,” The man introduced himself. “Yeah… we’ll need to change your name,” Erik replied. “How do you feel about being ‘Irish’?” <> “We have a show!” Barnum shook Erik’s hands. “The new poster’s ready gentlemen!” Rarity sing-sung. The girls laid out the new banner for Barnum’s museum and unfolded the final piece for display before the gentlemen. “That’s wonderful, mon ange!” Erik smiled. “But we need it five times bigger!” “Yes! And I want it everywhere!” Barnum instructed. “Carriages, sides of trains, trolleys, crates, milk bottles, everywhere they look!” “Okie-dokie-lokie, P.T.!!!” Pinkie replied, with a thumbs up. “One series of 5x posters for ‘Barnum’s American Museum’ coming right up!” And as the girls carried the banner to make the adjustments necessary, Barnum took note of what the pink Party pony mentioned. “P.T. Barnum…” Barnum thought, smiling. “I love it!” Soon, everything was coming along in more ways than Barnum could possibly imagine. All the banners hung high and proud over the museum for everyone in the city to see. Soon word would spread of all these astonishing oddities that Barnum himself brought together to stand before them as living pieces of art for their viewing pleasure. And as Barnum stood outside seeing the public who were bound to come together to bear witness to these marvels, his thoughts turned to a future that would soon dawn upon him and his troupe like the rays of sun. A dream that was finally going to become… a reality. https://m. Hundreds of people turned to thousands, as they lined up at the ticket booth paying their coins for tickets to see this show. And thanks to the money, not only were they able to pay off the loan, but they had more than enough for the finest clothing a man can afford. In which case, the most breathtaking uniforms for Barnum and Erik to wear before the public’s eyes, bright colors for Barnum and a fancy new dark tuxedo just for the former ‘Phantom’. Course they made a few extra adjustments for their marvels, making the Heavy man, a.k.a. the ‘Lord of Leeds’, ‘heavier’ and the Tall Man ‘taller’. The time was soon coming for the group to present themselves before their public but to say folks like Lettie were nervous was an understatement. Suddenly, the giant lost his balance as he tried to assume the new height given to him. And despite the efforts of his fellow performers and the Equestrians, the giant’s stumbling released the curtain unveiling their presence before a rather stunned audience. And from the very moment their eyes locked upon these strange, abnormal beings they couldn’t help but gasp with shock. For a moment, during a long awkward silence between the acts and the audience, Barnum and the others toward a nervous Lettie who was in no hurry to unveil herself before the people. “Lettie! Lettie!” Barnum ushered. “They’re waiting!” “For what?” Lettie asked. “For you, of course,” Erik insisted. “No…” “It’s okay to be scared, I know how that feels,” Fluttershy assured. “But I think you can truly be great, if you’d just try.” “Fluttershy’s right dear,” Rarity agreed. “They don’t know it yet… but they are going to love you!” “Trust us,” Barnum smiled. Eventually, they were able to convince Lettie to join her fellow performers despite the shock of an astounded audience. All that remained was convincing ‘Tom’ to go out. There he stood dressed as Napoleon, but they knew he had to be out there in order to make the showcase complete. “Tom!” Barnum shouted. “Up, up!” With her magic aura at the ready, Twilight used her magic to lift Tom onto his steed to prepare him for his entrance. All the while Barnum applied the finishing touches so the look they were going for with the little man would be complete. And in the blink of an eye, Barnum’s vision for his museum came to fruition. The audience found themselves captivated by the display of such a tremendous assortment of marvels, especially the children many of whom could relate to being outcasts. Before their eyes, these unique individuals were like superheroes. So many varieties of sights and colors, so many backgrounds and various features. All of them different, yet they were basking under the spotlight turning what they deemed as ugly into beauty in a matter of seconds. Even Tom got really into his act like he truly believed himself to be Napoleon. Even the ponies and Spike really got into the act, perfectly able to blend in with this crowd given how unique they were in their own form. To give the show quite a ‘flare’ so to speak. Through the roaring crowd, amongst all the applause, the troupe could hear the cries of the people. All of them shouting ‘That was great!’ or ‘More!’ and one even shouting ‘Fantastic!’. Everyone in the city loved Barnum’s museum and his assembly the unnatural, all… except for one man sitting in the crowd. He just stared toward the group, putting in a few notes as if he’s seen enough to know just what he paid admission for. And little did Barnum and the group know; they were in the presence of one of the toughest critics in the entire city. <> “This is bad!” O’Malley spoke. The man dropped a newspaper before P.T. Barnum and Erik. All the others gathered around the pair, seeing the article that was just published in today’s newspaper. The few words highlighted in the paper truly stood out. “’Criminal’!” Twilight read. “’Degrading’!” Rarity gasped. “’A circus’!” Barnum pointed. “I like ‘circus’!” “Barnum’s Circus…” Pinkie pondered. “Now all we need to do is find a man named ‘Bailey’.” “Why would we want to find a guy named Bailey?” Rainbow remarked. “Exactly!” Of course, the group did not have time to think when a commotion distracted them from their thoughts. Quickly heading outside, the group were stunned by the sight before them. A mob of violent men started a fight with the troupe. There were shouts and jeers, punches thrown left and right, as the troupe fought hard to defend each other from these vicious men. “Hey!” Erik shouted. “That’s enough!” “Walter!” Barnum shouted, stopping the ‘Dog Boy’. “Inside, all of you. Right now.” The Equestrians rushed in to the performer’s aid, helping them backstage as the men continued to jeer for them. Spitting at them and shouting insults as if they were no more than animals obeying their master. “We don’t want your kind!” “Get outta here!” “That’s right, you freaks!” “Your master’s calling!” “Why don’t you come over here and say that to my face, you filthy coward!!!” Rainbow threatened. “That’s quite enough, Rainbow,” Erik spoke. “Just let them go.” Satisfied with their part, the vile men proceeded to walk away after fulfilling their ‘service’ toward the gathering crowd who were witnesses to this assault. But all they did was stand and gawk at the scene, forgetting for the fact that these ‘performers’ were still people yet were treated no better than exotic creatures in a zoo. Still Barnum’s mind was on something far bigger than a mere attack. “Reprint this review,” Barnum instructed O’Malley. “In every paper in New York. Half-price tickets to anyone who brings it in.” While Erik and he Equestrians were more concerned that Barnum seemed to have little care for that attack that occurred, whatever he planned seemed to be paying off. Those very same reviews were soon printed in all the newspapers as per the man’s instructions. Only instead, he turned the criticism completely around in their favor and those words meant to bring them down instead convinced the masses to attend their shows. So many people ended up coming, that the ticket booth was immediately closed after selling out a single show alone. And despite all the odds, despite the criticism and the violent backlash, the show kept going and Barnum even embraced the identity of being ‘The King of Humbug’. And as Barnum stood with his troupe, as he posed before his public, everyone erupted in cheers and applause. The man smiled feeling in his heart that for the first time in his life, the people ‘loved’ what he had to offer, and all those cheers were made just for him. That he got that approval from nearly everyone in the city, from his family standing in the corner and to every man, woman, and child sitting in the stands. Barnum stood in a world of spectacle and humbug… and he truly felt like a king. <> “Peanuts!” A Vendor shouted. “Get your peanuts here. Hot, salted peanuts. Piping hot!” “One for me, one for the lady!” A man ordered. Business was picking up as usual for Barnum’s American Museum, now Barnum’s Circus. As Barnum and Erik passed by, to check upon the people, they happen to catch O’Malley attempting to walk away with some money he took from the man. “O’Malley,” Barnum cleared his throat. And as O’Malley dropped his findings in Barnum’s hand, the man turned to the sight and caught a familiar face. There before them was the very critic from some of their shows who tried to tear down everything Barnum had been working to. But rather than viciously confronting the man, they instead decided to be… a little more ‘mature’ about it. “Ah, Mr. Bennet from the Herald,” Barnum greeted. “Have you met my business partner, Erik?” “Come for another show I presume?” Erik inquired. “Tell me, gentlemen, does it bother you that everything you’re selling is fake?” Mr. Bennet asked. “Do these smiles seen fake?” Barnum replied. “It doesn’t matter where they come from. The joy is real.” “So, you are philanthropists?” Bennet questioned. “Why? Is a hyperbole the worst crime?” Erik replied. “Men suffer more from imagining too little than too much,” Barnum added. “The creed of a true fraud,” Bennet remarked. “Mr. Bennet, when was the last time you smiled or had a good laugh?” Erik asked. “Like a ‘real’ laugh? A theater critic who can’t find joy in the theater… now who’s a fraud?” Getting the last word against their greatest critic, Erik and Barnum proceeded to walk away in triumph. But Barnum was not quite finished. “Oh, Mr. Bennet,” Barnum spoke up. “That word you used to describe my show? Has a nice ring to it.” Now Barnum was finished with Mr. Bennet, as he and Erik proceeded to leave to proceed with their business. Course their conversation had not gone unnoticed, as Rara peered in from hiding upon listening to the way the men handled their critic. Seeing Erik, she stepped around to approach him. “How do you do it Erik?” Rara asked curiously. “He said ‘all’ that mean stuff about us, and you, and our show… yet you just handled it like his words meant nothing. How did you do that?” “Take my advice my friend,” Erik suggested. “Never let them see they’re getting to you… that’s how they win.” “They ‘really’ don’t bother you anymore, do they?” “Well… not ‘anymore’. I was an emotionally unbalanced man back in Paris, but you ponies saved my life… now I just want to be the bigger man. Try it sometime… I think you’ll be surprised.” And just like that, Erik walks away to rejoin Barnum leaving Rara to ponder Erik’s words. Standing by herself wondering if maybe there was some slight merit in Erik’s advice.
Show BusinessA few weeks passed since the first show performed by the P.T. Barnum Circus. Since that day, there had been many more shows with an even higher attendance than the first. It surprised Barnum, Erik, and the Equestrians just how successful the show had actually gotten in such a short amount of time. Now it is true they had their fair share of incidents, with critics' reviews and altercations with those who believe the show to be nothing but a glorified freak-show. However, this did nothing to deter Barnum or Erik from their show. As a matter of fact, all it had done was encourage them to keep going bigger and better. Before too long, the show had gotten so successful that Barnum had enough money to sell the run-down apartment that his family and their new friends had been staying in and purchase a new piece of property. It was going to be a grand surprise for Charity and the girls. Now here they were with Barnum leading his wife and daughters, with their eyes covered, toward their new home. “And right this way,” He ushered excitedly. “Don’t you think there’s enough blind trust in my life?” Charity giggled. “Well, isn’t that what makes it fun?” Right behind, Erik, Spike, and the girls followed closely behind as they spoke. “Ooh, this is so exciting!” Twilight smiled happily. “I am so happy for Mr. Barnum and his family.” “I just can’t believe how quickly thinks turned around for Mr. Barnum,” Spike replied. “I mean a few weeks ago, he was on the verge of going completely broke. Now he’s pleasantly wealthy and moving to a new place.” “That’s the power of positivity little dude,” Rainbow nodded. “Now don’t go playin’ innocent now hun,” Applejack scoffed. “Ya’ll weren’t exactly bein’ positive before when Phineas and Erik first came up with this here idea.” “I said I was sorry!” “Yeah, I heard you,” Applejack responded. “Oh, please don’t argue you two,” Fluttershy pleaded. “Especially not when things are going so well.” Both Rainbow and A.J. sighed as they looked at one another for a moment before finally speaking. “Ah’m sorry,” Applejack apologized. “Me too,” Rainbow nodded. Just then, Pinkie popped up in between them and wrapped both hooves around their shoulders. “There now you see, that’s the spirit!” Pinkie smiled happily. “Every pony loves each other, we’re having super-duper Pinkie Pie fun, and making money while doing it. And besides, how many carriages have we ridden that were pulled by a zebra before?” True to her word, when they awoke that morning, Barnum and his family picked them all up in a magnificent carriage being pulled by a zebra. It was certainly wacky to say the least, but then again, they were involved in circus work, so it made sense. Phineas helped Charity out of the carriage while guiding her forward. “Keep coming,” He instructed. “Okay, are you ready?” Removing the blindfold, Barnum smiled as Charity stared wide eyed at what she saw before her. It was the old run-down mansion they visited when they were children. It had obviously since been reupholstered and remodeled to where it was all shiny and brand new. Charity and even the Equestria group all seemed quite shocked at the sight of the large mansion that stood before them. “Is it?” Charity gasped. “It is,” Phineas smiled. “Wow!” Twilight gasped in shock. “I couldn’t have said it better myself darling,” Rarity nodded. “This is absolutely magnificent. However did you manage to do all this?” It was then Erik stepped up alongside his wife and friends. “Well, he certainly didn’t do it alone,” He smirked. “While he handled the performances of the show, I handled the operation and money. So, I was able to take some of the money, hired the best architects in New York, and arranged for them to work night and day to bring this mansion back to glory.” Everyone turned to Erik with wide eyes and bright smiles. “You did this for us?” Charity asked. “Of course!” Erik nodded. “I couldn’t very well let the co-owner of Barnum and Bailey’s Circus and his family live in squalor.” “Barnum and Bailey’s?” Rara asked confused. “Ah yes, my new alias name… James Anthony Bailey.” Barnum approached the former opera ghost and placed a single hand on his shoulder as he looked at him with a most grateful look. “Thank you, my friend,” He smiled. “I cannot even begin to express my gratitude for what you have done for me and my family.” Erik merely nodded his head in thanks as Barnum walked back up beside his wife and daughters. “Come on. Let’s go.” Soon the entire group walked forward towards the new house. Both Caroline and Helen put their hands on the two big front doors of the manor and pushed with all their might. The door opened wide and as they walked into the mansion, all eyes looked around in amazement over the fine décor and all the extravagant designs of the mansion. Clearly no expense was spared during the renovation of this mansion. “Wow!” Charity gasped. “It’s so beautiful!” Rarity smiled. “I have similar plans for a new home for you and I that will be constructed upon our return home,” Erik informed his wife. “You can still have your boutique just as you love it and come home to a wonderful home every night. A lovely place for our family to grow.” Rarity had a few tears springing from her eyes as she literally jumped into her husband’s arms and they both embraced tightly. As they were doing this, the two Barnum girls were still admiring their new house. “Helen, that’s for you.” Barnum gestured to a lovely looking dollhouse which Helen ran straight over to and started playing with it. Barnum then handed a beautifully wrapped present to Caroline. “And, Caroline, this is for you.” Caroline ripped the wrapping paper off the present and opened the box within. She smiled brightly upon seeing a pair of ballet slippers, just like she had wished for. She threw her arms around her father who laughed upon being hugged. “There’s a ballet school right down the street,” Phineas told Charity. “Just past your parents’ house, actually.” “Don’t tell me you bought this house just to rub my parents’ noses in your success?” She responded. “Well, that wasn’t the ‘only’ reason,” Phineas said, before sharing a kiss. “This is the life I promised you. Shall we?” He then grabbed her hand in his as they began to waltz around the grand foyer, smiling happily as they did so. “Phin… it’s beautiful, but you know, we don’t need all of this to be—” Charity found herself cut off when Phineas lifted her into the air and spun her around causing her to laugh. “It only took me 25 years, but… welcome home, Charity Barnum,” Phineas said proudly. Off to the side, Caroline walked up to the Equestrian group. “Um can I ask you guys for a favor?” She asked. “Of course, sweetie,” Fluttershy nodded. “Ask away.” “Can you please watch me practice my ballet so I can rehearse performing for a crowd?” “Of course, Caroline, we’d be honored,” Twilight nodded. Rainbow Dash started taking a few steps back. “Um, you’ll have to excuse me,” Rainbow said. “I have something to do that won’t allow me to stay much longer. See ya!” She tried to take off and fly into the air but found she couldn’t get very far because Applejack caught her tail in her teeth. Applejack quickly pulled her marefriend down to the ground, drew out her lasso, and proceeded to tie her up and sit her back down beside her. “You’re stayin’ right here and given’ the girl yer support… or ya can ferget about havin’ anymore of mah homemade apple cider!” She threatened. With a little growl and a glare, Rainbow sat completely still as Caroline began her ballet routine. <> Later that night, the Barnum’s and even the Equestria group found themselves seated in a very fancy concert hall as they watched Caroline’s ballet recital. After watching her practice session earlier, they all could see that she was a very talented girl. She might have been a little shaky at times, but what performer wasn’t? Now they all sat and watched her perform like the little star she no doubt was destined to be. The only one who didn’t seem happy was Rainbow Dash, who sat and grumbled in sheer boredom until the show was over. By the time all was finished, everyone gathered in the grand hall for general mingling. “I think that was a marvelous performance,” Rara spoke with admiration. “Same here,” Twilight agreed. “I really think Caroline stole the show out there. The other girls were really good, but she was great!” “She certainly does have the potential to shine brightly,” Erik agreed. Off to the side, Phineas took notice of a handsome young man mingling with a few high-class patrons as they sipped their beverages and engaged in small talk. Though he put on the act of being happy, Phineas could tell this young man felt trapped by all of this. “Hey sweetheart, who’s that young man over there?” He asked Charity. “Oh, that’s Philip Carlyle,” Charity responded. “A bit of a scandal, they say. His last play was a hit in London.” “Play?” Phineas chuckled. “You pay good money to watch people stand around and talk for two hours, and they call me a con man.” Off to the side, Erik and the Equestrian group watched as Caroline made her way out from the backstage area and over to the other dancers. They also noticed how the other girls started mocking her. “Ew, hat’s that smell?” One girl asked. “Do you smell that?” “Ew, something ‘does’ smell,” The other responded. “Oh, I know what it is… peanuts.” Both girls snickered and laughed as they walked away, leaving poor Caroline standing there and feeling sad. It was then Rara approached her and placed a gentle hoof on her arm. “Pay no attention to them Caroline,” Rara said. “You were amazing out there tonight. Quite frankly, they’re just jealous of you.” Caroline gave no response and just shrugged the hoof off as she walked away. “Oh, the poor girl,” Fluttershy sighed sadly. “If there is one thing I can’t stand it’s bullies!” Rainbow spoke through gritted teeth. “Now don’t go off and do somethin’ crazy sugar cube,” Applejack told her. “Don’t worry, I won’t,” Rainbow assured. “Despite how much I ‘really’ want to…” Little did any of them know that Phineas had also seen the entire thing from the sidelines. He couldn’t help but feel sorry for his daughter. When he was younger, he suffered the same sort of scorn and mockery from children for being both the son of a tailor and homeless. Nonetheless, he tried to put on a good face for his family as they made their way from the concert hall and towards their waiting carriage. “I can see it right now,” Phineas declared proudly. “Youngest prima ballerina in the history of the city ballet.” “I’m quitting,” Caroline said flatly. “What?” Phineas asked in shock. “Why would you quit?” “I started too late. I’ll never catch up.” “Caroline, you were the best dancer on that stage.” Caroline faced her father with a deadpan expression. “What? You think I can’t spot talent?” “Ballet takes years of hard work,” Caroline responded. “It’s not like the circus. You can’t just fake it.” <> Later, back at home, Charity and Phineas sat in their room together. While Charity did her hair, Phineas was trying to figure out what to do about his daughter wanting to quite ballet. She just couldn’t quit. She was one of the best dancers on the stage and she was giving up simply because a few snobby girls stuck their noses up at her. Phineas couldn’t stand the thought of his daughter giving up. “She can’t quit,” Phineas told his wife. “No. No, I mean, she just… she just feels out of place with the other girls.” “Well, I should certainly hope so,” Charity responded. “I’ve never seen so many little prima Donnas in my life.” “Yeah, but those prima Donnas are the most important thing in the world to her right now.” “She’ll learn to ignore them just like I did,” Charity assured. “She shouldn’t have to,” Barnum replied. “New York society will never accept us.” “If they did, they’d have to stop judging and actually do something with their lives.” “This isn’t about me.” “Oh. So it’s different than everything else then?” Charity retorted. “I just want her to be proud of who she is, of her family.” “She is proud,” Charity assured. “We don’t have to be the Carlyle’s.” Hearing her say the name made Phineas freeze for a moment, and an idea popped into his head. Quickly approaching the side of the room, he grabbed his coat and hat then made his way to the door much to his wife’s confusion. “Where are you going?” She asked confused. “Just out for a bit,” Phineas responded. “But it’s already so late at night.” “Don’t worry, I won’t be too late,” Phineas smiled. Walking out the door, Phineas blew a kiss to his wife and then made his way down the hall with specific intentions in mind. Stopping in front of one of the guest room doors, he gave a quick knock to which was answered by none other than Erik. “Good evening Mr. Bailey,” Phineas jokes. “Going from a ring master to a comedian are you?” Erik asked, rolling his eyes. “How can I help you?” “I’ve found a possible new business associate for us. I need your help to convince him to join us.” Erik raised an eyebrow toward Barnum for a moment before grabbing his cloak and followed him out the door. Whatever Barnum was planning, it would either be really good… or really bad. <> Walking down the streets of New York, Erik and Phineas made their way towards the direction of the concert hall. A recent play by Philip Carlyle had just ended as people spilled out of the hall. They passed by many different patrons and other folk before finally finding the man they were looking for. For there stood Philip Carlyle himself, leaning against a stone wall with a drink in his hand and a dazed expression in his eyes as the two gentlemen walked beside him. “Mr. Carlyle,” Phineas spoke to him. “You produced this play?” “Yes, I did indeed,” Philip responded. “Refunds are available at the front box office.” This got a chuckle out of both Barnum and Erik, who merely reached their hands to shake the young man’s. “P.T. Barnum,” Phineas introduced himself. “James Anthony Bailey, at your service,” Erik greeted. “From the circus?” Philip asked. “Yes. You—you’ve been?” “God, no,” Philip chuckled. “But I have seen the crowds. People leave your shows a great deal happier than when they came in, which is much more than I can say for my play.” “And yet, you have no trouble selling tickets,” Erik responded. “As a man of the theatre myself, I must say you don’t seem to be doing so bad for yourself.” “That’s because I’m selling virtue,” Philip responded. “Can I buy you a drink?” Phineas asked. Philip looked between the two gentlemen before getting a smile on his face. “You can buy me two…” <> Later on, the three men found themselves sharing drinks at a local tavern. “I wanna go after the carriage trade,” Phineas explained to Philip. “Present legitimate acts, expand our appeal, go after the snobs.” “If you only knew how suffocating they are.” “Believe me my young friend, I have experience with their kind,” Erik responded. “They always look down upon those they feel they are superior to. If you are not highborn or have any success, you mean nothing to them.” “Sounds about right,” Philip nodded. “So come join the circus,” Phineas offered. “Teach me how to appeal to the highbrows.” Of course, Philip looked at him as though he were speaking like a raving mad man. “Are you serious?” He asked. “Mm-hmm…” Phineas nodded. “Mr. Barnum, I can’t just run off and join the circus.” “Why not? Sounds thrilling, doesn’t it?” “Not to mention you clearly have a flare for show business,” Erik added. “Show business?” Philip spoke confused. “Never heard of it.” “That’s because we just invented it,” Erik smirked. “Let’s just say I find it much more comfortable admiring your show from afar,” Philip chuckled. “Comfort, the enemy of progress,” Phineas said, throwing back a shot. “Do you understand that just associating with you could cost me my inheritance?” “Oh, it could cost you more than that,” Phineas responded. “You’d be risking everything. But, on the other hand, well, you just might find yourself a free man.” All three men threw back another shot before they did what most men who’ve had a few too many shots do in a situation like this… sing. https://m. Philip Carlyle stood for a moment as he considered the notion going through his head. Then a big grin spread across his face as he turned right back around. Grabbing a shot of whiskey off the counter, Philip raised it up with a smile on his face. “Sir, it looks like you have yourself a junior partner,” He declared. Barnum and Erik both raised their own glasses as the bartender rang up their drinks on the cash register. “What I have is an overcompensated apprentice,” Barnum joked. “Either way, it means more money in our pockets and more attention to our cause,” Erik smiled. The three men toasted to their new partnership before throwing the shots back and slammed their glasses onto the countertop. With that in mind, the three men made their way back to Barnum and Bailey’s Circus. From the sky box high along the Circus building, Philip emerged in time to see Anne Wheeler in the midst of her trapeze act, and she rose high enough to where they locked eyes with one another. In that one instant, the rest of the world stood still and there was no one else except them in that exact moment. Then, as quick as it begun, it was over as Anne fell right back into her routine and Philip just stared after her almost in a trance. “Who is that?” He asked. “Perhaps we can introduce you,” Erik smiled. Leading the young man out of the sky box, Erik and Phineas drew him down to meet the acts. “Hey, hey!” Barnum shouted loudly. “No one’s buying hats back here. Get out front, go!” It was then Anne and W.D. came back after finishing their routine. Erik approached the pair eagerly to introduce them to Philip. “W.D., Anne, allow me to introduce our newest hire, Mr. Philip Carlyle.” “It’s a pleasure to meet you,” W.D. greeted. “Yeah, pleasure,” Philip shook his hand. “And what is your act, Mr. Carlyle?” Anne asked. “I don’t have an act.” Anne merely chuckled at that response and gave him a mischievous smirk. “Everyone’s got an act.” She walked off back to the changing room with Philip watching her every step of the way. At that moment, Mr. O’Malley ran in looking quite worried. “Mr. Barnum! Mr. Bailey!” “What is it O’Malley?” Erik asked. “You better come see this.” Erik ran off with Phineas right on his tail. Phineas called back to Philip, who was still in a trance. “Philip, keep up!” Philip turned back only to come face-to-face with a very stern W.D., who had caught him gawking after his sister. Philip merely smiled nervously before awkwardly scurrying off behind him. When he finally caught up with the circus owners, he was surprised to look out upon an angry mob with signs and torches in front of the building. By the looks of them, they were quite angry indeed. “A bit of a nasty element,” O’Malley commented. “There always is, isn’t there?” Erik asked. “Nothing draws a crowd quite like a crowd,” Phineas added. “We don’t want you in our city!” “Go home, you freaks!” “Freaks!” Erik and Barnum both looked at each other quite nervously. Clearly the crowds of hateful patrons were growing far more angrier and violent by the day. They feared that sooner or later this little spark would light the fire that would eventually end them for good. They could hope that sooner or later they’d find a way to stop it… hopefully.
This is MeAuthor's Note Before we proceed with this chapter, a few things first. Number one, all the dresses for the ponies in this chapter, minus Spike, were made by my wonderful costume designer: cheerful09. Secondly, imagine Spike looking older and wearing the same outfit. Now then let's get on to the chapter shall we? This is Me The very next day, after hiring Philip Carlyle, everyone gathered at the circus after the events of the night before. Barnum and Erik had since returned to the mansion and told the others what happened. From meeting with Philip, hiring him into the show, and all ending with an encounter with an angry mob of protestors. Then, of course, the bad news only continued the moment they received the local newspaper the next day and got one look at Mr. Bennett’s latest review. Now they all sat together, listening along with the rest of the troupe as Phineas read the paper’s review. “’Shame of the city’,” Barnum read. “’The protests cement Mr. Barnum’s reputation as a purveyor of the offensive and indecent’.” “Offensive and indecent?” Lettie repeated. “Mr. Bennett, I am blushing.” “No, I’m blushing,” Helen giggled, off the side. “First some pony has the never to try and ruin ‘my’ career with bad reviews, now the same thing is happening here?” Rara spoke up. “Doesn’t anyone else find that coincidental?” “It certainly seems eerily similar in a way,” Twilight agreed. “All it shows is that no matter what world you end up in, there’s always those who want to tear down hard-working people,” Rainbow spoke. “It’s deplorable and outrageous, that’s what it is,” Erik spoke up. “What do you care what Bennett thinks?” Lettie asked. “He’s a prig.” “And a snob,” Charles finished. “Yeah, and all the snobs in New York read him,” Barnum reminded them. “He does their thinking for them.” “Whatever happened to thriving off controversy?” Charity asked. “Yeah, well—hey.” It was then Philip Carlyle came walking in to greet everyone. The moment they saw his arrival, they all smiled. “Ah our young Mr. Carlyle has graced us with his presence,” Erik said jokingly. “Do you have any thoughts on this?” “Philip!” Caroline and Helen yelled, hugging the young man. “You know what?” He replied. “As a matter of fact, I do.” He procured a folded piece of paper from his pocket, handing it to Phineas who proceeded to unfold and read the fine print. “’The Master of the Household has it in command of the Queen to invite Mr. Phineas T. Barnum and his theatrical troupe to a reception at Buckingham Palace’,” He read. Hearing what he was saying made everyone stand up in shock and begin conversing amongst each other. The Queen was inviting them all to Buckingham Palace? Surely it had to be some sick joke orchestrated by someone trying to get their hopes up. Why on Earth would the Queen invite them to a royal gathering? And at the palace? “The Queen Victoria?” Charity asked in shock. “Is this real?” “I don’t know,” Rainbow spoke suspiciously. “It sounds like a trick.” “I had to pull a few strings,” Philip nodded. “If you want society to accept you, you may as well start… at the very, very top.” “Are we all invited?” Anne asked. “I’d certainly hope so,” Applejack added. “Ah mean we all done pitched in and helped this here idea take-off.” Everyone looked at Philip expectantly to which the young man sighed before looking directly at Anne. Taking a deep breath, his decision was made. “I guess I’ll just have to tell the Queen that either all of us go… or none of us will.” This caused everyone to burst out into joyous chatter at the prospect. They were about to go to England and meet her royal highness, Queen Victoria herself. This sort of thing doesn’t happen every day, especially for circus folk. “The Queen of England!” Charles said excitedly. “Can’t get much better than that.” “This is going to be the biggest… party… EVER!!!” Pinkie yelled. She pulled her confetti cannon out of her mane and proceeded to fire it all over the room as everyone laughed and danced around in joy. In the midst of all the joy and excitement, Erik paused for a brief moment as he looked through the crowd and his eyes landed on Rara celebrating with her friends. A small smile crept across his face as he came up with another glorious idea in mind. Walking slowly toward Philip, he pulled the young man aside to speak with him privately. “I need to include something in your letter to the Queen,” He whispered. “We’re already pushing it by asking if everyone can attend,” Philip warned. “What else could we possibly ask?” “Trust me, this will be well worth it,” Erik assured. <> A few days later… The entire troupe made it all the way to England and now walked through the halls of the famous Buckingham Palace. For the longest time, England had been the largest governing power in the entire world before the United States gained its independence from British rule. But tonight was not a history lesson, tonight was all about making history. Tonight, the Barnum and Bailey Circus would be meeting with the Queen of England herself. Barnum, Philip, and Erik all dressed in their finest attire while the rest of their troupe dressed in their usual getup. Rarity, as always, created a fabulous ensemble for herself and her friends. “Honestly Rarity, I can’t stress enough how amazing you are with designing our dresses,” Twilight spoke, admiring her own. “Why thank you darling,” Rarity smiled appreciatively. “I of course always put everything I have into my work.” “Well ya certainly don’t disappoint,” Applejack replied. “Never been one fer getting’ gussied up mah self, but when ah do, ya always know how tah really make me look all fancy.” “Eh, I like it and all but the sooner I get out of this the better,” Rainbow groaned, trying to scratch her back. “These things make me itch up a storm.” “Aw come on you big party pooper!” Pinkie piped in. “Looking good from time to time never hurt any pony. Besides, if you want to have the best party ever, we must look the part!” “Why aren’t we in tails?” Philip asked Barnum. “We’re the entertainment,” Phineas replied. “Don’t exactly see you in a costume,” Lettie jested. Following behind the royal escort, he lead them into the throne room where a large number of people were already assembled around the Queen, who sat upon her throne at the end of a long red carpet. The escort bowed his head to his Queen before introducing the group. “Your Majesty, Mr. Phineas T. Barnum and his… ‘oddities’ from America!” The escort stood aside allowing the entire group to make their approach down the carpet. All around them, they could hear the chatter and murmuring from all around them. “Is that—is that real?” A woman whispered. “I cannot be certain,” A man replied. Eventually, the entire group reached the end of the red carpet and now stood directly before the young Queen Victoria. Philip made his way before the rest of the group and bowed toward the queen. “Your Majesty,” He greeted. “May I present Mr. Barnum.” “The honor is mine, Mr. Barnum,” The Queen replied curtly. “And I’ve heard all about your little colonel from my friends in America.” This caused Charles to step out from behind Barnum, dressed in his usual general outfit. “General, ma’am,” He corrected. “You’re even smaller than I imagined.” “Well, you’re not exactly reaching the top shelf yourself, sweetheart.” This caused everyone in the group to gasp in horror over the fact he just uttered such strong words to the Queen. Barnum and Erik looked horrified, as did the Equestrian group. They anxiously stood waiting to see what would happen next. They could only imagine the punishment for insulting the Queen not even a minute into meeting her. As if all of Twilight’s worst fears about letting down Celestia were slowly coming to light. But thankfully, Queen Victoria took no offense to it at all… actually, she started laughing. This caused a chain reaction from all around her, and soon everyone started laughing as well. Granted, the laughing coming from the Equestrians and the circus troupe were more awkward than everyone else, but what else could they do? “Oh, I do so love the sense of humor in your troupe,” The Queen laughed. “Well met Mr. Barnum, well met indeed.” Barnum bowed his head again before quickly leading the troupe off to the side before things could get any worse. Philip grabbed a drink for himself, Erik, and Barnum while everyone else stood off to the side. “That went well,” Barnum spoke awkwardly. “It certainly could’ve gone worse,” Erik replied. “At least we get to leave with our heads.” Philips’ head seemed a thousand miles away as he focused more on Anne off to the side. Just then, a fanfare played throughout the hall as another royal escort stood at the entrance to the throne room. “Your Majesty, Miss Jenny Lind.” The escort stepped out of the way allowing a beautiful red-haired woman to enter the throne room. She had her hair tied back in an extravagant bun and wore the most beautiful white dress ever seen. Her mere presence garnered much attention from everyone in the throne room, including Mr. Barnum. “Who’s that?” He asked Philip curiously. “The opera singer?” “Singer, huh?” “She’s the most famous performer in all of Europe,” Philip explained. “She’s sold out La Scala a dozen times. Not to mention the French Opera.” To say the least, Phineas was quite impressed with her background. So much accomplished through singing alone. It was then his brain began to spin uncontrollably with ideas. Leaning over toward Erik, he started whispering into his ear. “We need to get her to perform for us,” He spoke. “And exactly how do you propose to do that?” Erik asked. “Trust me, I can be persuasive.” “Very well…” Erik sighed, rolling his eyes. “But under ‘one’ condition.” “Of course, just name it.” “We’ll invite Miss Lind to join our troupe, IF we introduce Rara to her as well.” This caused Barnum to face his partner in confusion. “Why?” He asked. “Because in case you’ve forgotten, Rara’s a singer and my star talent,” Erik responded. “I promised her I’d help her regain her confidence in her singing back. What better way than this?” Barnum turned over his shoulder toward the group of chattering ponies and Spike, amongst them was Rara herself. He sighed to himself but realized Erik raised a strong point. “Alright, you can bring her over,” He relented. Erik nodded and approached the group to collect Rara. In the meantime, Barnum gently pushed Philip forward much to the young man’s confusion. “What are you doing?” He asked. “Following you, so you can introduce me to Miss Lind.” “Introduce you?” “Yeah.” “I don’t know her.” “Everybody knows her,” Barnum scoffed. “You just said so yourself.” “Yeah, exactly,” Philip responded. “You don’t just march up to someone like this.” “Why not? We’re personable. She’s a person.” Getting right up alongside Jenny Lind, Barnum cleared his throat to draw her attention and they both smiled when she turned to face them. “Miss Lind,” Philip greeted, bowing his head. “My name is Philip Carlyle, and this extraordinary gentleman next to me…” “Phineas Taylor Barnum,” Barnum interrupted. “The pleasure’s mine.” He grabbed her hand with his and gave said hand a kiss like a proper gentleman. At that moment, Erik walked over with Rara at his side as well as the rest of the Mane Six and Spike. They all bowed their heads in respect, as Erik shook her hand. “Miss Lind, it is a pleasure to make your acquaintance,” Erik greeted. “I am James Anthony Bailey, co-owner of the Barnum and Bailey Circus.” “A great pleasure Mr. Bailey,” Jenny smiled. “I have someone I’d love for you to meet if you would madame. She’s the best singer under my employment currently going through much criticism. I figured meeting you might help boost her confidence.” The group looked down as Rara walked alongside Erik and bowed her head. “It’s very nice to meet you Miss Lind,” She greeted kindly. “I am Countess Coloratura of Equestria, but my friends call me Rara.” “And let me tall ya ma’am, she’s got some set ah pipes on her she does,” Applejack added. Jenny chuckled in amusement as she looked down toward the little mare and her friends. “It is quite nice to meet you as well Miss Coloratura,” Jenny bowed. She soon turned back toward Mr. Barnum. “Of course, you are the American,” Jenny responded. “I believe I might have heard of you.” “Oh, well, if you’ve heard of me all the way over here, I must be doing something right.” “That, or something very wrong,” Jenny retorted. “Well, in the world of publicity, there’s hardly a difference,” Barnum returned. “I believe those are the words of a scoundrel, Mr. Barnum.” “A showman, Miss Lind, just a showman. The best on my side of the Atlantic.” “Well, if you do say so yourself.” “I do, but I don’t have to.” “Oh no, Miss Lind,” Twilight interrupted. “He’s one of the very best.” “Very kind of you,” Barnum replied, brushing her off. Twilight was a slight taken aback by that. A bit rude of Phineas to just brush her aside as though what she said didn’t matter. “Miss Lind… let me get to the point,” Barnum proposed. “I’d like to bring you to New York. And if you agree, I’ll make you the most famous singer not in Europe, but in the entire world.” Jenny squinted her eyes at him for a moment before getting a slight smirk on her face. “And have you heard me sing?” She asked. “Absolutely!” Philip nodded. “No,” Phineas shook his head. “No, I haven’t. But like mine, your reputation precedes you, and, well, I trust your reputation more than my own taste, so…” “I’ve never been to America,” Jenny argued. “You will sing in the grandest theater with the finest orchestra in the greatest city on Earth,” Barnum assured her. “’Jenny Lind, one night only’.” To which received a chuckle out of both of them. “Or maybe two. And at 20 percent at the gate, it’ll be a queen’s ransom for your efforts.” “I give most of my earnings to charity, Mr. Barnum,” Jenny retorted. “To orphans and widows.” “Voice of a Nightingale, Heart of an Angel,” Philip spoke, with admiration. “Certainly an act to follow,” Erik added. “That’s brilliant!” Barnum agreed. “I mean the press will go crazy for that story.” “That’s not a story,” Jenny denied. “May I ask you something, Mr. Barnum?” “Anything.” “Why me?” She asked seriously. “People come to my show for the pleasure of being hoodwinked,” Barnum responded. “Just once, I’d love to give them something real.” Jenny once again squinted at him, thinking long and hard about his offer. It was certainly a very tempting one that she’d be foolish to turn down. “I think we might be able to accommodate that Mr. Barnum,” She nodded. “Fantastic!” Barnum said with glee. “… On one condition.” “What might that be?” Barnum raised a brow curiously. “Only if she performs as well,” She addressed Rara. “ME?!” Rara exclaimed in shock. “Indeed,” Jenny nodded. “If you are truly as good as your manager says, I would love to see you perform.” “Miss Lind.” The sound of a man’s voice drew Jenny to a group gesturing her to join them. With that in mind, Jenny Lind walked off to join the group leaving everyone standing there in shock. The one most shocked for certain was Rara. She’d just been asked to sing in front of a human audience… in New York… and to open for Jenny Lind. Oh boy… <> A few weeks later… Everyone safely made it back to New York City after a rather eventful trip. After Jenny agreed to perform in New York, Phineas worked tirelessly to make it happen. He rented out the biggest opera house in the city and prepared all the arrangements to get Jenny to New York. Now the night had come to perform, with the Barnum family all standing outside the opera house as many patrons made their way inside. “Everyone is here,” Barnum said excitedly. “Look at this. Even the Winthrops.” “Are you happy?” Charity asked. “I will be if this works,” Phineas responded nervously. “Oh, God. I hope she can sing.” Meanwhile, inside the opera house, tensions were at an all-time high for Rara. Naturally she’d done this many times in her life and yet this was the most nervous she’d ever been before a show. So many thoughts circulated in her mind over this very moment. Was she going to be terrible? Did she even deserve to go up and perform? All this rushed through her head as Rarity put the finishing touches on her outfit for the performance. “Now don’t ya’’ worry none Rara,” Applejack assured. “Yer gonna do great tonight same as ya always do.” “Not to mention we’ll be out there cheering for you all the way,” Fluttershy added. “Girls I… I just don’t know,” Rara sighed dejected. “No need to worry darling,” Rarity assured. “You’ve done this countless times before. Just imagine this as those other concerts.” “But the reviews…” “Those reviews came from non-believes in ‘Equestria’, not here,” Twilight spoke up. “In this world, you’re a blank slate.” “Exactly!” Spike nodded. “You just go out there tonight and shine as you always do. I’ve no doubt in my mind they’ll want more.” Rara released a deep breath as the kind words from her friends sunk in. “I really appreciate you guys for saying so, and for being here for me,” She smiled appreciatively. “I’d like a few moments by myself, please.” “No problem Ra,” Rainbow assured. “Just remember: No matter what happens tonight, we’re still here for you. Right guys?” “Right!” Every pony nodded in unison. Soon the whole group left the backstage area and made their way into the theatre. It was at that moment P.T. Barnum walked backstage to prepare for the show. He spotted Rara, the mare sitting alone holding a newspaper. Judging by the look upon her face, she seemed worried… more so than usual. Concerned, Barnum approached the mare and sat beside her as if trying to figure out what was up with her. “Worried about the show?” He asked. “I am…” Rara replied. “Actually… more than that.” “How so?” In response, Rara showed Barnum the review on the newspaper. Numerous statements were on the page including, ‘Her voice isn’t good enough!’ and ‘Why would any pony want to see her on stage with a voice like that?’. Things no person nor pony ever want to hear. “I know it’s just words on paper, but every time I see them I fear my career is over. Like some pony is writing my death sentence.” Soon as Rara finished speaking, she felt an arm wrap around her body. She turned her head and before her eyes she saw Barnum looking toward the ceiling. As if he was looking past the roof and gazing toward the sky. “Rara, I think you’ve been going about this the wrong way,” Barnum spoke. “What do you mean?” Rara asked. “When I’m working on the show, I don’t think of what the reviews are going to say. I think only of how that crowd will cheer when they see it and how it will be the best day of their lives. I know you’ll give out the performance of a lifetime… now you must ‘believe’ you can.” Hearing Barnum’s words made Rara feel slightly better. One man having so much faith in her, despite her uncertainty of what the future held or if her career would be ruined or not. But one thing she knew for certain was that if this were to be her final performance, she intended to go out with a bang. “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She smiled. “You’re welcome,” He spoke quickly. “Now I really need to find our other star tonight.” Quickly making his way to the side of the stage, he looked out toward the gathering ensemble of the elite and the orchestra preparing just as Philip and Erik came up from behind. “What’s taking her so long?” Phineas asked nervously. “They’re still taking their seats,” Philip assured. ‘Speaking of which…” “Yeah?” “Tom and Lettie, the others, they’ve just arrived.” “What?” Barnum asked shocked. “I have reserved Box Five for the show,” Erik spoke up. “Shall I have them put there?” “That box? No, no, no, that’s a bit visible.” “Visible?” Philip asked confused. “The acoustics are actually better in the standing room,” Phineas replied. “That’s where they should be.” “Miss Lind’s ready now,” A stagehand informed. “Okay. Thank you, thank God!” He quickly walked off downstage leaving a very confused Erik and Philip behind. “Why would he have a problem with his own troupe being seen?” Philip asked Erik. “I’m not sure,” Erik shrugged. “Somehow I suspect Mr. Barnum is changing… and certainly not for the better.” “What do you mean?” “My friend, I fear we shall soon find out.” <> The Mane Six and Spike made their way towards their private box in the opera house when they noticed something very odd. The entire circus troupe stood at the back of the theatre near the doors. This confused them because they were expected to be at the box waiting for them. They approached the troupe to inquire just what the deal was. “Why are you guys sitting way back here?” Pinkie asked. “We have reservations at Box Five where we can ‘really’ get the party started.” “We were asked to stay back here,” Charles told them. “Stay back here?” Applejack questioned. “By whom?” Before anyone could answer, Mr. Barnum pushed his way out from behind the curtain and stared out amongst the gathered audience. “Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for your patience,” He addressed. Looking toward the crowd, he could clearly hear the majority of their comments. “He’s out of his element.” “What is this about?” “Is that Barnum?” “This isn’t the circus.” Barnum just brushed the comments to the back of his mind and proceeded. “I recently had the privilege of hearing the most divine voice I’ve ever heard,” He continued. “Now I know that sounds like Barnum humbug… but I have a hundred bottles of good champagne on ice that says this isn’t just another sideshow novelty. But first, before we begin, let us start with a little preshow. Ladies and gentlemen, give it up for the one… and indeed the only… Countess Coloratura!” Everyone in the audience clapped as the curtains slowly unveiled to reveal Rara standing on stage looking relatively frightened. The moment everyone saw the pony on stage, the audience began to murmur in confusion. This did nothing to help with her anxiety one bit. Then she glanced toward the back of the theatre, taking note of the troupe and all her friends smiling at her. Turning toward the side she saw Erik, Philip, and Barnum smiling as well. Seeing them show their encouragement made a smile spread across Rara’s face as she took a deep breath and stared back toward the audience. And then… she sang. *Stop at 2:55* Soon as Rara finished the song, a long momentary pause took place as the audience just sat there staring at her with wide eyes. No one spoke, no one made any noise, no one even moved. Rara got that horrible feeling inside and instantly she believed they ‘hated’ it, that they hated her. A lone tear made its way down her cheek, as she bowed her head in shame before making her way off stage. And then… it happened. The crowd erupted into cheers, clapping as they stood on their feet and gave her a standing ovation. Rara turned back in surprise before a smile found its way to her face once more. Looking back, she could see the entire troupe clapping as well along with all her friends cheering. “Way to go Rara!” “That’s mah friend!” “You’re amazing!” Rara took a moment to soak it all in, giving the crowd a few more bows before making her way off stage. For the first time in a long while, Rara truly felt… amazing. Barnum made his way back onstage and he too clapped for Rara. “My wasn’t that just an amazing opening performance?” He addressed the crowd. “And now ladies and gentlemen, the moment you have all been waiting for. May I present… the Swedish Nightingale… Miss Jenny Lind!” Once again, the crowd clapped as the curtains opened once more revealing Jenny Lind in a beautiful dress of her own as she stared out toward the crowd. The orchestra started up once more and Jenny Lind sang out in a beautiful voice. Once again, the audience erupts into cheers and applause as they began yelling out words of congratulations toward the fabulous opera singer. “Brava!” “Brava!” “More!” “Wonderful!” “Bravissima!” “More!” “Excellent!” “Encore!” The whole time this went on, Barnum looked out in amazement at the cheering audience. Never before had he ever had such a large number of people of such high class cheering for a show that he had orchestrated. And somewhere, deep within that crowd, Mr. Bennett the critic slowly stood up from his chair… and he actually applauded. Everyone was impressed with Lind’s performance, even the Equestrians and the whole circus troupe… well, almost all of them. <> A short white later, a massive party was underway in celebration of a magnificent show. Champagne popped as everyone mingled, laughed, and all together had a good time. Rara was at the party as well, surrounded by millions of different people and answering all their questions. For her, it really felt good to have this kind of recognition again. Over on the other side of the room, Barnum was introducing Jenny to his family. “Jenny, this is my wife, Charity, and our girls,” He introduced. “Of course, and I’ve heard so much about you!” Jenny smiled, looking at Caroline. “And your father tells me you’re a fan of ballet.” “Yes, I’m ‘studying’ ballet,” Caroline replied. “Are you?” “Of course, I am.” “And, of course, she is,” Phineas added, chuckling. “And what about you, Helen?” “You look like a princess, ma’am,” Helen responded. This caused everyone in the group to laugh in humor, just as Rara came alongside the rest of the group and they all looked at her. “Ah, here’s the other half of the amazing performance tonight,” Barnum smiled. “Well done tonight Coloratura.” “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She thanked him. “It felt amazing to finally get back on the stage and be appreciated once more.” “Well, you certainly deserved it,” Jenny smiled. “I suppose your manager was right about you after all. Such an amazing talent you hold in you.” “Speaking on which, where’s Mr. Bailey?” Phineas asked. “Oh he had to go and check on Rarity and the others. But he should be back soon.” Looking past them, Barnum saw none other than Mr. Bennet from the newspaper walking by. “If you all will excuse me for a moment,” He said. He left the group to continue their conversation as he walked right over to Mr. Bennett to speak with him. “Mr. Bennett,” He greeted. “How kind of you to attend tonight.” “I have to admit, Barnum… she is remarkable,” Bennett complimented. “Enough to bring joy to the most joyless critic, isn’t she?” Barnum mocked. Bennett kept a smooth composure despite having clearly just been insulted. “Mm… and in the hands of a real purveyor of the arts,” Bennett shot back. “She could be something in this country. Shame she’s fallen in with you.” “You really are better on the page, Mr. Bennett, hard as that is to believe,” Barnum finished before walking off. As he continued walking throughout the room, a few patrons approached him and greeted him with adoration. “Mr. Barnum, I’d love to met Miss Lind,” One woman said. “And you will meet Miss Lind,” Phineas replied. “Would you introduce us?” “If you just give me a moment—” “Phineas.” The sound of a very familiar voice that he really hoped he would never have to hear again instantly took much of the joy out of Barnum. He turned around and came face-to-face with Mr. and Mrs. Hallet. He had not seen Charity’s parents ever since she had left so they could start their life together and he was not at all pleased to see them even now. “Yes,” He spoke civilly. “You’ve… done well,” Mr. Hallet complimented. “Thank you.” He then decided he wanted to milk that finally, for once in his life, Charity’s parents finally saw how successful he really was. And just how wrong they had been about him for years. “Allow me to introduce you,” He smiled. He lead them promptly over to Jenny Lind herself. “Uh, excuse me, Jenny,” Phineas spoke. “I’d like you to meet Charity’s parents, Mr. and Mrs. Hallet.” “Ah, pleasure,” Jenny greeted. At that moment, Charity looked over from where she was across the room and noticed her parents. Already she knew that if she didn’t step in, this would surely go badly. “How do you do?” Mrs. Hallet greeted. “Very nice to meet you.” “Good to meet you,” Mr. Hallet added. “Mother.” Mr. and Mrs. Hallet both turned over and saw their daughter approaching along with their grandchildren who they had never met until this very moment. “Hello, dear,” Mrs. Hallet said happily. “Are these—” “Yes, yes, those are your granddaughters,” Phineas interrupted. “Phineas, not here!” Charity warned. “Not here?” Phineas replied in false confusion. “You afraid I’m gonna embarrass your parents in front of their fancy friends? I—I really don’t think I have that power.” The whole time he spoke, he was looking directly at Mr. Hallet with a look of near disdain and superiority in his face. “An insignificant man like me who was clearly destined to lead an insignificant life.” “All that fortune, and still just the tailor’s boy,” Mr. Hallet replied. “Get out,” Phineas spoke lowly. And just like that, Mr. Hallet gave one last glance at Phineas before grabbing his wife and walked out f the room. Phineas looked over and noticed the upset look on his wife’s face. “Well, Phineas… I believe I told you that free champagne is a recipe for disaster,” Jenny joked. Clearly Charity officially had enough of the night. She grabbed the girls and quickly made her way out of the room. “Charity!” Phineas called after her. “Now would everyone please raise their glasses?” Jenny announced. “To Mr. Barnum, who has shown once and for all that a man’s station is limited only by his imagination.” “To Barnum!” Everyone cheered. “Thank you,” He replied. “To Mr. Barnum,” Jenny added. “Thank you. It’s hard to understand wealth and privilege when you’re born into it. Phineas merely chuckled at that statement as Jenny leaned in to tell him something she never told anyone else before. “I sometimes don’t feel like I belong here,” She whispered. “You?” He asked surprise. “I was born out of wedlock… and that brought shame upon my family,” Jenny confessed. “And life always manages to remind me that I don’t deserve a place in this world. And that… leaves a hole that no ovation can ever fill.” Just then, the sound of boisterous laughing drew everyone’s attention to the door. Phineas quickly walked forward, knowing full well who it was. He made it to the door just in time to see his troupe and the Equestrians arriving. “Mr. Phineas!” Lettie said happily. “Lord, that lady can sing!” “Not to mention Rara just blowin’ everyone’s minds!” Applejack laughed. “Ah knew she’d be alright.” “I know,” Barnum responded quickly. “Think she likes a man in uniform?” Charles asked with a smirk. “I’m sure she does. Okay, what are you doing here? You got a show in an hour, okay?” “That’s enough time for us to have at least three drinks, right?” Rainbow asked. “It’s not a party until Pinkie Pie gets there,” Pinkie giggled with glee. “Plus, we came to congratulate Rara on a job well done,” Twilight added. “Come on, let’s go!” Spike ushered. Everyone and every pony made to walk inside, but Barnum blocked the way and nearly pushed them back out. “No, no, no. Lettie!” “What?” Lettie asked confused. “It’s very crowded in here, okay?” Barnum spoke. “And I can’t have you mingling--guys!” Once more they tried to make it through the doors. But Barnum pushed them back harder. “Who’s gonna pay admission if you’re out there for all the world to see?” “Now hold up a minute,” Applejack spoke up. “Ah ain’t goin’ nowhere till I see mah friend and congratulate her.” “It’s only polite if we do darling,” Rarity added. “Yes, that’s it!” Fluttershy nodded. “A.J.?” Everyone looked past Barnum, spotting Rara peeking out from the door. “There ya are, Rara!” Applejack smiled. “Ah gotta say ah was mighty impressed with…” “Yeah that’s great A.J.,” Rara interrupted quickly. “But I really need to get back inside. I have a lot of people wanting to talk to me.” “That’s no problem darling,” Rarity assured. “We’re merely here to give our congratulations and then we’ll be on our way—” “Sorry guys, I really don’t have time to talk tonight,” Rara shook her head. “Everyone’s talking about how Countess Coloratura is the best they’ve heard, and this is my one chance to make a good impression on this world.” “But Rara…” Applejack spoke up. “Okay? Have a great show!” Barnum finished quickly. “Mr. Barnum, wait!” Fluttershy called out. But it was too late. Barnum quickly slammed the door shut on everyone’s face. And there they stood, completely in shock. But none more surprised than the ponies and Spike. To say that they were beyond confused is the biggest understatement of the century. “What the hay just happened?” Rainbow asked. “That… is precisely what I feared.” Everyone turned toward the side and found Erik standing in the corner, a look of disappointment on his face. “What do you mean Erik?” Twilight asked. “I’ve been watching very closely for a while and I’ve noticed that Phineas hasn’t been ‘happy’ with being only the ‘Circus King’,” Erik explained. “Philip and I tried to talk him down, but he insists he needed more. Then when we went to London and met with Miss Lind for the first time, I believe greed has taken over.” “You mean…” Spike began. “I’m afraid so young Spike,” Erik nodded. “He’s no longer pleased with the circus and wishes to focus solely on Jenny Lind.” This assumption was only confirmed the moment they heard the chiming of a glass and heard Barnum’s muffled voice from the other side of the door. “Ladies and gentlemen, a toast!” Barnum announced muffled. “Jenny, America may not know it yet… but they are going to love you.” Hearing those words made the entire troupe feel extremely betrayed and saddened. The exact same thing Barnum used to say to them when they started the circus together. Words from a man who once gave them a place where they felt was home, a chance to be more than what they’ve always been. Except now… he just tossed them aside like yesterday’s newspaper, the same way the rest of the world had for years. Lettie released a sob, as her emotions took over and she started to sing. And regardless of what the world has to say of them all, no matter what choice words they utter or what gestures they make in a threatening manner, nothing will change what the troupe or the Equestrians are. They may appear to be weird to everyone else, most of them are not of high standards, and they don’t think the way as these people do. But they are more than just a sideshow carnival act. They are individuals, they have feelings, and all they ever wanted are the same thing that everyone strives for: Respect… and dignity. For they know what they are, they are ’proud’ of what they are, and nothing was going to change their minds.
A Change in BehaviorThe next day, following the amazing performances by Jenny Lind and Rara, needless to say things were not going smoothly for Barnum and Bailey Circus. Phineas was so engaged with setting up Miss Lind’s next performance he was completely ignoring his duties as co-owner of the circus. Whenever matters came up regarding future shows, he’d always shove them on Erik and Philip while he kept his focus on climbing the social ladder in New York. And then it only got even worse from there… Phineas had announced he was going on tour around the country to manage Jenny as she performed. To say both Philip and Erik were none too pleased to hear the news would’ve been a major understatement. Hence why they found themselves trying to talk to Barnum about it, as the next show was being set up and Barnum unfurled a large promotional poster for Jenny Lind on his desk. “Why can’t you just put more shows in New York?” Philip asked him. “Why do you need to tour the country?” “Why did Napoleon march on Russia?” Phineas retorted. “I’d like to point out that Napoleon was ‘defeated’ in that invasion,” Erik reminded his partner. “Napoleon didn’t have a 60-piece orchestra.” “A 60-piece orchestra?” “Just get the cheapest musicians you can and watch that.” “We’ll still have to board them,” Erik reminded Phineas. “It’s not as simple as you make it out to be.” “We’ll get married ones,” Phineas suggested. “They can share a bunk.” Just before leaving the office, Phineas turned back and noticed O’Malley messing with his daughter’s piggy bank. “O’Malley, that’s Caroline’s piggy bank,” He reminded, as they left. Out in the main performance ring, many of the troupe were rehearsing for their acts that night. Fluttershy’s main job was working with the animals of the show. Currently, she was trying to calm an upset elephant who refused to eat. She tried to gently encourage him to eat, but the gentle giant simply refused. “Aw, come on now Titan,” She encouraged kindly. “We got you some nice quality hay and grass. I promise you’ll love it.” Titan the elephant just waved his trunk around and knocked the cart of hay and grass off to the side much to the Pegasus’s surprise. “What’s wrong big guy?” Fluttershy asked. “You’ve been like this for days; it’s not healthy for you. Just tell me how to make it better for you and I will. I promise.” Titan just moved his giant head toward the direction of the upper walkway. It was then Fluttershy noticed Barnum, Erik, and Philip continuing on with their conversation. “Custom sets?” Philip questioned. “Yeah,” Phineas nodded. “Fireworks?” Erik continued. “Uh-huh.” “Inside theaters?” “That’s genius!” Barnum smiled. “No. Hey, P.T.!” Philip called after Phineas. “These are the most famous theaters in the country. They make you buy the seats in advance just to book them—” “Yeah, I took out a loan,” Phineas interrupted. “Not to mention we’d have to pay Miss Lind in advance,” Erik added. “She’s certainly not cheap to book—” “It was a large loan, okay?” Phineas interrupted again. “My point is you won’t see a penny of profit until your 40th show…” “41st, actually.” “Do you ever listen to yourself?” Erik argued. “You’re risking everything we’ve built here!” “How do you think we built it?” Phineas asked. “We took risks and it paid off. We’ll have plenty of profits to go around after this.” Philip finally had enough with all this nonsense. He grasped Barnum by his shoulder, and forced him to face him. “P.T.?” “What?” “Your attention has been divided long enough.” “He’s absolutely right,” Erik agreed. “Our gate is down, and we have more protestors every day. Yet all you seem to care about anymore is how high you can rise on the social ladder instead of how you got there to begin with.” “You just need to get people to come back,” Phineas shrugged. “If you haven’t been to the Barnum Museum lately, you haven’t been at the Barnum Museum.” “In case you forgot, it is as much my museum as it is your!” Erik shot back. “Barnum and Bailey, just as we agreed! I put up my own business in order to help you and your family out of financial disaster! I’m the one putting all of my plans aside to cover for you.” “They come to see you,” Philip reminded Barnum. “Your crazy ideas… your new acts, the unusual.” “Well, then how about you show them a smile?” Phineas shot back. “That’d be unusual. Keep rehearsing. Just make it very clear I expect them to afford you all the deference you deserve and that they should be nice to you anyway.” And just like that, Phineas made his way through the backstage area and out the back door. This left Erik and Philip looking after him in disappointment and the rest of his troupe looking hurt and angry. “Ain’t that a sight for sore eyes?” Lettie commented. “Couldn’t even say ‘hello’,” Charlies added, shaking his head. “Or ‘goodbye’,” Philip sighed. “He’s going on tour. Sorry, guys.” “Oh, pull yourself together, Carlyle,” Lettie rolled her eyes. “Don’t you have somewhere to be?” Philip grabbed his pocket watch from his pocket and looked down at the time. He realized he was running very late. Erik placed a hand upon his shoulder and the young man looked up toward the smirking gaze of the Phantom himself. “Best not keep young Miss Wheeler waiting,” He chuckled. “Go on and have a good time. I’ll take care of things for tonight.” “Are you sure?” Philip asked. “I was pulling the strings of the theatre arts long before you were born,” Erik replied. “I can handle the show. Now go… give her the best night of her life. And make every moment count.” Philip nodded with a smile and raced off to meet with Anne. Erik knew that a thing was going on between Philip and Anne Wheeler, especially from what his pony friends mentioned (Mostly Rarity). There was a spark between those two, yet they barely seemed to push it any further due to whatever reluctance weighed upon the boy. Erik could only hope this night would turn out well for them and lead to something more. Everyone else watched after him, while Charles chuckled over his departure. “That boy has got the love disease for Anne bad,” He chuckled. “That he does,” Erik nodded in agreement. “But we cannot focus on his business. His affairs are his own after all. Let’s focus on tonight’s show.” “What’s the point, Mr. Bailey?” Lettie sighed. “Without Mr. Barnum, there isn’t a point in any of this.” “Surely you can’t believe that.” “It’s the truth,” Charles added. “None of us would even be here if it wasn’t for him. We’d still be going about life being kicked around and laughed at. We’re all just a bunch of freaks and monsters.” At that moment, Fluttershy made her way backstage toward the others. She overhead them talking in between comforting Titan and hearing them say such talk hurt her heart. “That isn’t true,” Fluttershy told them. “You are all wonderful human beings just like everyone else. Sure you may not look like other people, but that doesn’t mean you should feel less than others.” Despite her kind words, Lettie and Charles just looked down sadly. “It’s nice of you to say Fluttershy,” Lettie thanked her. “Sadly, the rest of the world doesn’t think the way you and your friends do. There will always be people reminding us of who we really are. A bunch of abominations with no place in this world.” Seeing her friends so dejected and somber made Fluttershy want to cry. Instead, she retained her composure and was determined to prove to these poor people how much they should be treated the same way as she wanted to be… an equal. “You know… in the land I come from, ponies used to treat ‘me’ like an outcast,” Fluttershy admitted. “And for the longest time, I didn’t feel like I belong anywhere.” “You?” Lettie questioned. “When I was a filly, back when I lived in Cloudsdale, I attended flight school like my fellow Pegasi,” Fluttershy explained. “They bullied me often, poking fun at me just because I couldn’t fly as good as all the other ponies my age. Sometimes… I wonder ‘why’ I was even born a Pegasus, that maybe I should’ve been born an Earth pony. Had it not been for Rainbow Dash sticking up for me, being my only friend, I wouldn’t know where to be. She may be hard on me at times, but she was the one friend who treated me as ‘no’ different compared to any other Pegasus… or any pony for that matter.” “What’s your point, kid?” Charles retorted. “My point is… you only believe what you are because for the longest time, you haven’t had anyone tell you any different,” Fluttershy replied. “I believe all you really needed is what I needed all those years ago. What all us outcasts need.” “And what would that be?” Charles asked somberly. “A friend,” Fluttershy smiled. Both Charles and Lettie looked up toward the timid yellow Pegasus, who just smiled brightly and offered a hoof to each of them. They both looked at her for a moment of confusion before slowly reaching out and taking a hoof each. Fluttershy helped them stand before she broke out into song, one she hoped would inspire the troupe. Soon as she finished, both Lettie and Charles gazed upon her with big smiles on their faces and held back tears threatening to emerge. Never before had they ever had anyone in their lives so willing to be their friend, a friend willing to help them through their problems. They embraced the young Pegasus in a hug to which she happily returned. From the sidelines, Erik looked on with a happy look on his face. Barnum may have given up on the circus game, but not Erik and he never would. And without question, his friends clearly won’t give up on these people… not ever. <> Later that evening, Anne Wheeler, dressed in her finest ensemble, walked into the New York Opera House to see the latest show. All her life she wanted to go to the theatre and now here she was finally in a position she was able to do so. Mr. Barnum apparently left a ticket just for her and so she approached the ticket booth to collect it. “Mr. Barnum said he left a ticket for me,” She spoke to the attendant. The attendant reached down and pulled it out. To her surprise, the man proceeded to hand her not one, but two tickets. This most certainly confused Anne greatly. “I’m—I’m sorry,” She spoke confused. “I—I believe there’s only supposed to be one.” “No, there’s meant to be two.” The sudden voice beside her made her turn her head and see Philip Carlyle standing right next to her dressed in a fancy suit. The two stood there for a moment as they gazed at each other. They had not seen much of one another since the night of Jenny Lind’s performance, and they remembered that moment very well. In the midst of Lind’s song, Philip reached over and intertwined his hand with hers. In that one moment, Anne felt happier than she had ever felt in her entire life. Sadly, the moment was spoiled when they both noticed Philip’s parents in the audience looking at them funny. Philip quickly released his grip on her hand, which made Anne feel so foolish, so upset that she walked out of the hall. And now here they stood, face-to-face once more as if by chance… or destiny. “I wasn’t sure you’d come if I asked,” Philip said awkwardly. “Five minutes to curtain,” A man announced. Philip offered his arm to Anne, who accepted after a moment’s hesitation. He proceeded to lead her towards the entrance to the theatre where a wonderful show waited for them. “I’ve always wanted to go to the theater,” Anne told him. They both smiled at each other as they made their way up the steps. Then suddenly, they found their path blocked by none other than Mr. and Mrs. Carlyle, Philip’s parents. Both Anne and Philip looked toward them awkwardly. “Philip, is that you?” Mr. Carlyle asked. “Mother… father…” Philip nodded to them. “This is Anne Wheeler.” “Philip… have you no shame?” Mr. Carlyle asked appalled. “Associating myself with that Barnum business is one thing… but parading around with the help?” Hearing him say such a remark made Anne suddenly feel very out of place. She quickly turned heel and started making her way out of the building. “Anne!” Philip called after her. “Anne! Anne!” She gave no reply nor even looked back. She just walked out the front door as Philip looked on. The moment he turned to look at his father, anger drew upon the young man’s face. “How dare you speak to her like that?” He asked lowly. Philip started to follow her, only for his mother to hold out her arm to stop him. “You forget your place, Philip,” She said. “My place?” Philip asked. “Mother, if this is my place then I don’t want any part of it.” And that said, Philip pushed past his parents not once looking back. All he did was kept going and followed Anne out the front door determined to find her again. <> As it turned out, Anne hadn’t gone as far as Philip thought. She had made her way back to the circus building, where Philip followed her the entire way. The moment he entered the building, he found Anne in her costume sitting on the bleachers and he walked toward her. “Anne,” He spoke gently. “They’re small-minded people. Why do you care what they think?” “It’s not just them,” Anne responded, trying not to cry. “You’ve never had somebody look at you the way your parents looked at me. The way everyone would look at us.” Anne made to walk away, but Philip quickly turned on heel to face her once again as his true feelings for her came out in song form. Soon as the singing was over, Anne placed a single hand upon Philip’s cheek before she walked off. Philip found himself standing there, feeling hurt for two reasons. The fact that despite being willing to give up ‘everything’ for her, Anne seemingly didn’t want to be with him. But worse than that… he was angry at the world and its people for not accepting the idea of them being together. Circus business was not all smiles and laughs as he originally thought it was. And from the shadows, hidden in the dark, Erik had been watching the pair the entire time. He too was angry… only he was more sympathetic for the young man. In a way, Philip reminded Erik of himself… the way he had initially loved someone, but they could never be together. And that was long before he met ‘the one’, a very special pony, one he happily married and would soon share a child with… everything was working out for him. But for Philip and Anne… Erik knew it would take some form of magic to make their union a reality. <> Meanwhile, across town, things were truly falling apart at the Barnum mansion. Shortly after informing is family he’d be going on tour to manage Jenny, Charity made it very clear she was certainly not pleased. It wasn’t so much he would be traveling with Jenny that bothered her; rather, it was the fact he was willing to leave his wife and kids for such a long time. Charity was already content with the life she and Phineas had together with their family, but it still seemed that it wasn’t enough for him, and he always wanted ‘more’. Barnum was currently packing for the journey while his wife tried to reason with him. “First, it was buying a house on the same street as my parents,” Charity spoke upset. “Then, meeting the Queen. Then bringing Jenny Lind, then my father the other night. When will it ever be enough for you?” “I’m doing this for Caroline and Helen,” Phineas responded. “Look around you,” Charity gestured. “They have everything.” “You don’t understand.” “I do understand.” “No, you don’t understand,” Phineas responded loudly. “How could you? My father was treated like dirt. I was treated like dirt… and my children will not be.” “You don’t need everyone to love you, Phin,” Charity assured. “Just a few good people.” “I know that…” He sighed. No matter what Charity said, no matter how hard she tried, she found it impossible to make her own husband realize they didn’t need a life of luxury and wealth to be happy. All they needed was each other, that’s more than anyone ever needed. Phineas seemed to be the only one who didn’t seem to realize that. But of course, they weren’t the ‘only’ ones dealing with this problem. In another part of the mansion, Rara packed away a few essentials as ell for she too would be accompanying Phineas and Jenny on tour. After seeing her first performance on stage, the people demanded for more appearances of the magnificent pony with the voice of an angel. And soon… word of her performance reached out to nearly every country around the world begging her to perform there. It really made Rara feel good to feel wanted by the public again, to feel like that shining star she once used to be. Her friends, on the other hoof, had a different view on the matter. “What do ya mean yer leavin’?” Applejack asked, in shock. “I mean exactly what I said,” Rara responded. “Mr. Barnum wants me to open for Miss Lind every night during our tour of the country. This is an amazing opportunity for me.” “Yeah… for six months,” Rainbow emphasized. “I know it’s a lot, but it’s worth getting back to what I used to be.” “Darling, I more than any pony understand wanting your artistry to be adored by the millions,” Rarity sympathized. “But you’re talking about leaving everyone you know and love behind for Celestia knows how long.” “Now I love going on super-duper fun adventures with my friends a heap of a lot like the next pony,” Pinkie added. “But I can’t ever imagine leaving my friends, my family, or even Cheesy and Lil’ Cheese behind for so long like that.” Rara had just finished packing her stuff and released a deep sigh. She turned around to look the others straight in the eye. “Look guys, with all due respect, you don’t understand what I’m going through,” Rara told them. “You’re the Elements of Harmony, practically Equestria’s superheroes! Your legacy is literally built in stone, and even when you retire from all this for good, you’ll still be regarded as heroes for thousands of years! “Me… I don’t have that luxury. If I can’t be a singer, I’ve got nothing to live for. No pony or creature will look at me the same way ever again. I’ve strived to be the best for so long and I’m notabout to pass up an opportunity like this. I just… can’t.” Applejack squinted her eyes as her faced garnered a more upset look. “Is that Rara talkin’… or Countess Coloratura?” “What’re you talking about?” She asked, shocked and confused. “Yer actin’ just like how ya used to when Svengallop was yer manager!” Applejack responded. “Always worryin’ more ‘bout what other ponies think of ya more than what youthink of ya.” “It’s not the same!” Rara responded, greatly upset. “Back then, I made music that meant nothing more for me but glitz and glam. Here I am making music that actually ‘means’ something to me. All I want is for everyone to enjoy it. If you were truly my friend, you’d understand that.” This caused every pony to gasp loudly over her choice of words. Applejack was especially shocked that her own friend would even say such a thing. From day one, she was Rara’s number one supporter of living her music dream ever since they were fillies in summer camp. She helped her realize she just needed to be herself and everywhere she’d go folks would love her for who she was. Now Rara was twisting all of that into this brand new image of wanting to please others, and for what? For false glory… Applejack stared right at Rara’s face, frowning heavily. “Yer right,” She spoke. “Ah don’t understand it. Guess that means we ain’t friends.” Applejack quickly turned back around and made her way out of the room, slamming the door behind her. Every pony else and Spike stood in silence for a few moments before they slowly followed Applejack out the door. Soon Rara was left standing alone, a single tear falling down her face which she quickly wiped away and grabbed her luggage. She made her way down to the main hall where Barnum was waiting with his own luggage. “You ready to be a star?” He asked her. “As ready as I’ll ever be, Mr. Barnum,” She responded. The two departed the mansion and made their way down the steps where the carriage was already waiting in the road. Barnum held the door open for Rara and she jumped into her seat opposite of Jenny Lind. Barnum hopped in behind her as Charity, the girls, and the Equestrians came out to watch them leave. “Ah can’t believe she’s actually goin’ through with this,” Applejack sighed sadly. “Ah guess the Rara ah knew really is gone…” “I could say the same about Phineas,” Charity added solemnly. “No, no! Daddy!” Caroline cried out. “Daddy!” Helen cried. It broke the Equestrians hearts watching the pair race down the steps toward the carriage, as Barnum shut the door and signaled the driver to go. The carriage pulled off down the street as Caroline and Helen raced after it. Charity, the ponies, and Spike did nothing to stop them, they just stared sadly after them. Soon Charity began to sing a sad song for the loss of the man used to be her husband. https://m. Days turned to weeks, weeks into months, and in all that time life slowly moved on for the Equestrians and the Barnums. Caroline, the girls, and their friends did everything they could to enjoy each other’s company, but without Phineas and Rara it just wasn’t the same. True Caroline continued to excel at ballet, but what was the point? It always saddened her whenever a show was over, and she could see everyone there supporting her… except her father. Phineas, Rara, and Jenny were busy enjoying the spotlight that they absolutely had no idea how much they were being missed back home. Every night, Rara would open the shows to a standing ovation and Jenny would close with a showstopping number. When it was all said and done, the girls and Barnum would stand on stage to a cheering crowd who threw flowers at them. At this time, the spotlight and fame were all that mattered to them. As for the circus troupe, Erik and Philip somehow kept everything together as best they could. Yet without Barnum, the circus life just wasn’t the same. More and more protestors continued showing up by the day and made life ‘miserable’ for the circus. Lord knows it was only a matter of time before everything they had built would fall apart at the seams. Dinners at the Barnum Mansion were especially lonely for the Barnums and the Equestrians. Even after they’d break their bread and enjoy a wonderful meal Charity would prepare, the atmosphere was just too gloomy for them to enjoy. All they could think about was loved ones who couldn’t be with them tonight nor any night for that mattered. Picking at her food, Rainbow Dash briefly turned to an empty chair meant for a certain ‘marefriend’ and for once she was more worried than usual. She had a rough idea where she was, as Rainbow Dash’s eyes gazed up as if she could look past the ceiling. Most nights, Applejack would be in the guest room mainly by herself and she’d been very depressed since her fight with Rara. Granted, she wasn’t really sorry for what she deemed to be the honest truth (As harsh as she may have been) but she never felt so alone even among her friends and her marefriend... not till now. Once more, one of her oldest friends was gone, out of her life again… only this time, A.J. truly wasn’t sure if she’d ever see her again. But then, after what they each had to say, Rara likely wouldn't want anything to do with Applejack anymore. Trying her best to hold back any tears, she leaned back on the bed and tipped her hat so far down her face so none could see… but that didn’t stop her from silently weeping into the cold, lonely night.
From Now OnIt had officially been two months since Phineas and Rara departed for their tour with Jenny Lind. So far, things couldn’t be any better for them. Every single show they performed had an even bigger audience than the last, the reviews were amazing, and things couldn’t seem to get any better for them. Or at least… so they thought. For the first few weeks on tour, Rara had no problem with the performing the way she always had. However, shortly afterward, things changed for the little pony. Every night, she’d go onstage and perform for her loving public. But after the second month, as she gazed out through the crowd, she paid little mind to her adoring fans. Instead, all she could think about was her friends… especially Applejack. Ever since that horrible fight they had, before she went with Barnum on tour, initially Rara was glad to get away and perform any way she wanted. But after a while, she started missing having her friends around. To laugh with, to celebrate with her, and all together a band of girls (And Spike) just having a good time. As much as she adored being a famous singer, what was the point if there’s no pony around to share it with? All these thoughts raced through her head as she sat on the sofa in the shared penthouse suite she shared with Jenny and Phineas in their hotel in Cincinnati. On the couch across from her, Phineas and Jenny were celebrating all their success so far as they read the latest review from Mr. Bennett himself. “’It is as though we have learned for the first time what singing really is’,” Jenny read. “’Miss Lind deserves our nation’s highest esteem and most lavish ovations’.” Hearing her read the article made Phineas ecstatic beyond words. An amazing article from a man who originally thought him a fraud, as if everything he’s done to earn his respect was worth everything. “I mean…” He stammered. “The world is at our feet,” Jenny smiled. “Don’t you think so Miss Coloratura?” This snapped Rara out of her thoughts, as she put on a big fake smile. “Oh um—yes! It’s amazing,” She replied, half-heartedly. Jenny stood up from the couch and grabbed a few glasses for them all before pouring them all some wine. She handed one for Rara and the other for Barnum. “Well Mr. Barnum, Miss Coloratura,” She smiled. “This… is… to making dreams come true.” All three proceeded to clink their glasses together in a toast before taking a drink. “Thank you, Jenny,” Barnum thanked her. Both Barnum and Jenny gazed into each other straight in the eyes. For a moment, they were both completely frozen. The more Phineas looked at her, the more he realized what he left behind just to come here. Was all this really worth leaving his loving wife and two beautiful children behind? Eventually, he snapped himself out of his gaze. “It’s two hours to curtain,” He noted. “I’ve given you the world, haven’t I?” Jenny asked, smirking. “I—I, uh—I should go,” Phineas stammered. “I… I’ve become a distraction. I’m sorry, Jenny.” Hearing him say that confused Jenny greatly. “You should finish the tour without me.” “What?” Jenny asked, shocked. “You’re leaving?” “Well, the itinerary’s well in hand.” “So, that’s it,” Jenny said, feeling hurt. “What do you mean?” “I’m just another one of your little acts.” Jenny quickly set her drink down and stood up before proceeding to storm out of the room. “Jenny!” Phineas called out. “I’m done!” Jenny declared angrily. “Jenny. Jenny, please! You have to finish the tour.” “Must I?” “It—It will ruin me!” Phineas pleaded. “When you’re careless with other people, Mr. Barnum, you bring ruin upon yourself,” Jenny scoffed. “I have risked everything.” “Well, so did I,” Jenny replied tearfully. “And it seems we both lost.” Jenny turned around again and left the room without looking back. This left Barnum and Rara having the whole room to themselves. The popstar pony slowly walked alongside the disgruntled showman until they both faced one another. “What have we done?” Barnum asked her. “I know what we did,” Rara answered sadly. “We left everything and everyone we love so dearly behind. And for what?” “I was so tired of feeling like less than a man,” Barnum replied. “I wanted to show the world that Phineas Taylor Barnum was something special. And it cost me everything.” “I wanted to be the biggest star the world ever knew so badly, I’d push away my best friend to do it… again,” Rara whimpered. “Oh sweet Celestia… I’ve made a terrible mistake!” Rara was the next to run out of the room in tears, until only P.T. Barnum remained… entirely alone. <> Later that night, another performance was in process at the concert hall in Cincinnati. However, there was not nearly as much joy and adulation normally felt by Jenny, Rara, or even Barnum. Rara utterly refused to sing that night, preferring to remain backstage with Phineas. Barnum himself seemed millions of miles away in his head as he silently watched the performance. As for Jenny, she felt so sad and heartbroken as she stood out upon that stage and sung shakily. The performance finally came to an end, as the audience applauded and stood on their feet in respect. Cameras flashed all around as Jenny took a bow before them despite the less than perfect performance. Phineas eventually came out to stand alongside her and waved toward the audience. “Thank you,” He whispered to her. And then… the most unexpected thing happened. Jenny stepped forward and quickly kissed Barnum full on the lips as another camera flashed. Behind the scenes, Rara gasped loudly with surprise and covered her mouth with her hoof. To say she was shocked beyond words was the biggest understatement of them all. Phineas quickly drew back when Jenny kissed him, too stunned to put together what happened. “What was that?” He asked her. “That was goodbye,” Jenny spoke flatly. And without another word, Jenny Lind turned away and walked off stage. Rara raced alongside Phineas, who looked toward her in shock. “Did that really just happen Mr. Barnum?” She asked him. “I’m afraid it did,” He nodded. “Oh, I hope Charity will understand,” Rara spoke uncertainly. “She knows you’d never—” “That’s for me to worry about,” Phineas replied. “Now, I’m on my way to the train station and I’m going back to my family. Are you coming?” Rara looked up at Barnum with a content smile on her face. “Try and stop me,” She smiled. Phineas smiled back at her, as they both quickly ran for the door and toward the train station as fast as possible. After so long being blinded of the fact that all they needed was their family and friends, they weren’t about to waste a single second. They could only hope it was not too late. <> On the other side of the country, another miraculous show just concluded for the Barnum and Bailey Circus. As the many loyal patrons filed out of the building, Erik watched from the background as he often did for most of the show. When Barnum left, everyone wondered if he’d be the new ringmaster… but he preferred working behind the scenes as usual. Ergo, he permitted Philip to take the reigns for the time being. Speaking of the young Carlyle, Philip himself wished all the people a pleasant farewell for the evening up front. “Hey, thank you very much for coming,” He waved. “Tell your friends and neighbors! What a wonderful show! Who enjoyed themselves? You? You? Tell everyone how much fun you had at the circus! New acts every night!” Erik watched the young man with a sense of pride, considering how far he’s come in such a short time. He did not linger on these thoughts for very long though, as he turned his attention toward a rather solemn group of ponies and a teenage dragon. The Mane Six and Spike participated in the show of course, performing to the best of their abilities. But now that it was over, they were all just as glum and gloomy as ever. It had been this way since Rara left a few months prior and Erik quickly grew more concerned for their well-being, especially Applejack. When Applejack was not performing for the crowd, she didn’t talk much to anybody not even with the troupe. She’d huddle in some corner by herself and when she looked toward one direction it seemed as though she was looking into space. She’d sit in some corner, silent as a statue, she’d barely even eat or even sleep. And sometimes at night, when her friends would pass by to check, they could hear her… crying. It was proving more serious than even Twilight, Rainbow Dash, or any of her friends could imagine. After all, Applejack would always cry on the inside… least, that’s what she claimed. Walking up alongside his wife and friends, Erik sat alongside them following tonight’s performance. “Another show come and gone,” He sighed. “Yet despite all the joy in the audience, we have little to celebrate ourselves.” “Ain’t no point in celebratin’ when we’re one pony short,” Applejack groaned. “Yeah… it’s the ‘Star Wars’ incident all over again,” Pinkie sighed. “Aw, come on A.J.!” Rainbow spoke to her marefriend. “You’ve been depressed for two months straight.” “What would you expect darling?” Rarity asked. “Her best friend since foalhood walked out on all of us. She deliberately dismantled their entire friendship, and for what? Fame and fortune! How exactly would you feel if Tank up and left you after everything you’ve done for him?” Just the thought of her precious pet abandoning her and never coming back instantly made Rainbow shut up. She turned away before any pony could notice the tears welling in her eyes over that single thought alone. “Man, I never thought things would be ‘this’ upsetting since the day Tirek tried stealing all the magic in Equestria,” Spike huffed. “At least we defeated him and made everything right,” Fluttershy sighed sadly. “But this… I don’t even know what we’re supposed to do.” As for Pinkie Pie, as if she wasn’t already feeling depressed enough. When they looked at her, her hair was flattened out and her coat started losing its color again. There had been several instances when this would occur, and always when something really bad happened. “I really wish I had my Cheesy and Lil’ Cheese to make me feel better,” She sighed. “Right now, I feel nothing… I don’t even care about this stupid mission anymore. I just want to go home.” Erik felt so bad seeing his friends in such distress, and he looked at Twilight Sparkle, she just shook her head sadly. She had no answers to resolve this matter this time, and she had no words of encouragement to give. As if matters couldn’t get any worse, Erik turned over and noticed a very familiar group of men remaining near the tent. He knew it was them because they were certainly not a friendly bunch. “Wait here…” Erik spoke, before walking out. “Hey! Ringmaster!” One man called Philip. “Gentlemen, gonna have to ask you to leave,” Philip replied. All the men started to snicker as though Philip were telling a joke. “This is ‘our’ town, son,” The man spoke rudely. “We think you should leave. You and your freaks… and your spooks.” No Philip was started to get very angry; he would not ‘tolerate’ this assault on his new family. “Sir… I will only ask once more,” He warned. “Then what, boy?” “I’d listen to him if I were you.” The men turned over and saw Erik himself, walking toward them with his Punjab lasso twirling in one hand. Not only that, but W.D. Wheeler accompanied him ready for a fight. “Leave our circus...” Erik warned. “And stay away from our family.” “What are you going to do about it… freaks?” The man mocked. And just like that… all hell broke loose! W.D. threw the first punch, right in the man’s face, and the fight was on. Erik lashed out with a series of punches of his own, knocking down every man in front of him one by one. However, the two men alone couldn’t handle this mob of men for long and soon were overwhelmed as two of them grabbed Erik while the others beat the holy shit on W.D. “Get him!” A sudden rainbow blur swooped in and sent a man flying backwards. Erik looked up with a smirk as Rainbow Dash swooped in and laid waste on all the men in her wake. “I’ve had just about enough of you jerks!” She growled. “So… have… ah!” Applejack barreled in and tackled one guy to the ground. The rest of the Mane Six and Spike joined the fray, along with the rest of the troupe. “Charge!” Lettie yelled. The wolf boy took a man down with a spinning head-scissor, while the tattooed man leapt into the air to take down a man with a flying clothesline. The Lord of Leeds bounced one man back with his huge belle, while Lette held another guy in a headlock. Spike bonked two men’s heads together before sweeping their legs from under them with a flick of his tail. As they tried to pick themselves up, Applejack finished them both with powerful kicks to the head sending teeth flying out. Twilight and Rarity used their magic to fight back several men, while Fluttershy summoned her animal friends from the circus to hold the rest at bay. One man broke off from the rest of the group, ran backstage, and picked up a lit lantern from the table. Desperate, he chucked toward the back of the room and the moment it broke on impact a large blaze had been lit. <> Meanwhile, at the train station, Phineas and Rara just got off their train and left the station. Phineas turned to the side and smiled upon seeing Caroline and Helen running towards him. “Daddy!” They yelled happily. They both hugged their father in a tight grip, as the man laughed with joy upon hugging his two beautiful girls again. Rara watched this tender scene and couldn’t help but smile. “Girls, girls, girls!” He laughed. “Oh, you’ve grown so much. Stop it.” The girls pulled back as Charity walked up with a huge smile on her face and hugged her husband. “What made you decide to come back early?” She asked. “I missed you,” Phineas replied. “That sounds an awful lot like humbug,” Charity giggled. “And Rara, your friends will be so surprised to see you back.” “Hopefully the ‘good’ kind of surprised,” Rara said nervously. “I haven’t exactly left on the best of terms. They probably hate me.” “Oh, that’s ridiculous!” Charity shook her head. “Your friends have been miserable since they left, especially Applejack. Why for the past two months, she hardly ever left her room except for shows and if absolutely necessary.” “Really?” Rara spoke, feeling guilty. “I have to see her…” But before their conversation could continue, the ringing of a bell drew their attention as a fire carriage rolled by at an alarming rate. “Fire!” A firefighter yelled. “Move aside! Move aside! Come on! Hurry! It’s coming from the circus.” This made both Barnum and Rara extremely on edge, scared even. “Girls, stay with me!” He ordered. “Come. Quick, quick! Everyone, stay close!” With that, the Barnum’s and Rara ran as fast as they possibly could to reach the circus. Rara silently prayed the entire way that it wasn’t already too late. Eventually, they came around the corner and to their horror they saw the circus building in a complete inferno. Thankfully, most of the troupe already fled the building including the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik. “Philip! Is everyone out?” Erik yelled. “Is everyone okay?” “Yeah!” Philip responded. “What about the animals?” Fluttershy asked worriedly. “Don’t worry, we set them free,” Philip assured her. “What else could we do?” It was by that moment Barnum and Rara ran alongside them much to the surprise of the troupe, especially the Mane Six. “Rara!” They all yelled. “What are you doing back?” Twilight asked. “I came back because I couldn’t stand being without you guys,” Rara replied tearfully. “I only wish I never left at all.” “W.D., where’s Anne?” Philip asked worriedly. Rara looked toward the rest of the Mane Six and her eyes widened in fear. It was then she noticed that one of them was missing. “Sweet Celestia, where’s Applejack?!” She yelled. “Where’s Anne?” Phineas asked. “Where’s Applejack?” Philip turned back toward the burning building with the fear that Anne and Applejack may very well still be inside. Thinking on a whim, he quickly started running back into the building. “No, Philip! No!” Rara couldn’t stand the fact her best friend could very well be in there either. She quickly broke away from the others to follow Philip inside. “Rara, no!” The ponies and Spike yelled. The inferno continued to build and grow immensely out of control by the minute. Now Philip and Rara both ran back into the blaze. Everyone watched in fear and trepidation. Their attention turned to the side as they saw Anne and Applejack helping each other out of the other side. “Anne!” Phineas yelled. “Applejack!” The Mane Six yelled. The girls and Spike quickly ran to embrace their friend, who was covered in soot and Phineas draped a blanket around Anne. It was then that all their attention quickly returned to the building when they realized the horror of the situation. “Philip! Rara!” “What are we going to do?!” Twilight yelled. Phineas turned back toward Erik and they both shared the same crazy idea. Nodding to one another, Phineas quickly brought Anne back to her brother. “W.D.! Here she is! Here she is!” “Anne! Oh my God!” W.D. gasped with relief. Erik knelt down to hug and kiss his wife. “If I don’t come back, take care of our child,” He told her. Erin and Phineas both raced ahead into the blaze to rescue their friends. “Philip!” Phineas yelled. “Rara!” Erik yelled. “No! Daddy!” Caroline and Helen cried. “Daddy! Daddy!” The building groaned as the blaze rose higher and higher. Soon enough, it became too much to bear as the roof collapsed and fell down with a crash on the ground. Everyone watched in worry, as the Mane Six and Spike held onto each other while Charity and the girls looked on nervously. Suddenly, from inside the blaze, two figures slowly emerged carrying two other forms. Everyone was relieved to see Phineas and Erik emerge from the blaze coughing from the smoke and covered in soot. Phineas carried Philip, who was covered in soot, burn marks, and even a few burns on his body. Erik carried Rara, who had much of her coat and mane burned off and singed. “Daddy!” Caroline and Helen cried in relief. “Thank Celestia!” Spike and the girls cried. “Stretcher!” A fireman ordered. “Stretcher!” Phineas and Erik coughed as they positioned Philip and Rara on the ground. “They’ve taken a lot of smoke,” Phineas said. “They’re still breathing. Come on.” A few firefighters came in with two stretchers to life the unconscious pair up and get them to the hospital for immediate treatment. “Come on, let’s get them on!” The firefighters lifted the two up and loaded them into a carriage which immediately took off down the road towards the hospital. Everyone watched in horror as they were taken away and the firefighters started to extinguish the inferno. Barnum held his family and Erik clutched on Rarity tightly as everyone breathed a sigh of relief that this horror show was finally over. <> At the local hospital, the tension in the air was so thick that it could have been cut with a knife. Both Philip and Rara were laid up on hospital beds side by side and they were covered in soot and burn marks. Anne Wheeler sat right by Philip’s side the whole time, while the Mane Six, Spike, and Erik stood by Rara’s bedside. Applejack was the most distraught as she held her friend’s lifeless hoof and allowed the tears she normally held back to flow. “This is all mah fault!” She sobbed. “I never shoulda made her come.” “No, it isn’t A.J.,” Rainbow assured, rubbing her back. “You didn’t tie her up and drag her here. We wanted her to come because she’s our best friend. There’s no way you could’ve seen this coming.” “But ah did!” Applejack cried. “From the moment she came tah me, tellin’ me ‘bout them reviews, somehow ah just ‘knew’ she’d end up fallin’ back into bein’ Countess Coloratura. Me lettin’ come here gave her just wut was needed tah push her there.” “There’s no way that’s true Applejack,” Rarity spoke up. “You did ‘everything’ you possibly could as her friend to help her. You can’t blame yourself for what happened to her.” “If anything, I blame the people of this world… and a good deal of ponies back in ours,” Spike nodded. “Just because someone’s different or talented that they feel the need to tear them down and make them look bad. Now look what’s happened.” “I guess sometimes the real evil we fight isn’t always some big scary supervillain bent on world domination,” Twilight said somberly. “Sometimes the worst evil is what’s secretly hidden deep within someone’s own heart.” But Applejack wasn’t listening to what her friends were saying. She retained her focus on her unconscious friend. “The last thing ah said tah her was that she weren’t mah friend,” She sobbed. “Ah’ll never live with mahself if that really is the last thing ah ever said to her.” The rest of the Mane Six tried to comfort their distraught friend, as Erik slowly made his way over to Anne Wheeler, who just stared at Philip and clutched his burnt hand in her own. As tears came to her eyes, she softly and sadly sang a familiar song with shaky breaths. Anne (Sings): What if we rewrite the stars? Say you were made to be mine? Nothing can keep us apart You are the one I was meant to find Feeling a hand on her shoulder, Anne slowly looked back and saw Erik looking down at her with a look of sympathy and sorrow. “Despite everything you’ve been through, he truly loves you,” Erik said. Anne let the tears fall freely as she turned back toward Philip. “I know…” She croaked. For the rest of the night, the group stood watching over their fallen friends. Many tears were shed in sadness over the fact this was started simply because the world refused to accept what was different. <> The next morning… Phineas looked through the charred remains of what was once his greatest creation. The entire building was destroyed, along with everything in it. Phineas knew the fire was started by a group of men who hated what he built, but he blamed himself more than he did them. He allowed his ego and desire to get in the way of what mattered most to him, and he left it all behind. That was the reason why his entire circus was destroyed and two of his friends in the hospital right now. As if his anguish couldn’t get any worse, he turned around and saw Mr. Bennett standing behind him looking at the remains of the circus. “If you’ve come to gloat, I wouldn’t,” He sighed. Bennett walked alongside him and dusted off a spot with his newspaper before taking a seat next to the showman. “They caught the thugs who started the fire,” He informed. “I thought you’d like to know.” Both men just sat there for a few minutes as they sighed until Bennett finally decided to speak once more. “I never liked your show,” He said honestly. “But I always thought the people did.” “They did,” Barnum nodded. “They do.” “Mind you, I wouldn’t call it art.” “Of course not.” Then, for the first time since they first met, Bennett actually had a genuine honest review. “But... putting folks of all kinds on stage with you… all colors… shapes, sizes… presenting them as equals… why, another critic might have even called it… ‘a celebration of humanity’.” Hearing this made Barnum smile toward the usually cynical critic. “I would’ve liked that,” He said. “Well, I hope you’ll rebuild,” Bennett said hopefully. “I mean, thank God for Jenny’s tour,” Barnum smiled. “We can borrow off the profits, we’ll be fine.” “You don’t know?” Bennet asked confused. Barnum looked at Bennett with confusion before Bennett handed him the newspaper that he had. Barnum looked toward the front page and his eyes widened with shock. For on that page was a picture of Jenny kissing him with the headline, ‘Jenny Lind Quits’. “I’m sorry,” Bennett apologized. The critic soon took his leave as Barnum continued to stare at the paper in shock. He knew it was only a matter of time before this reached the public and now surely this would cause quite the scandal for him. Then another thought came to his head, one even worse than the last. Quickly dropping the paper, he raced for home. When he finally arrived, he pushed the door open and called out for his wife. “Charity?!” He called. Charity herself walked down the steps carrying a suitcase in hand. She looked at him with such hurt, such disappointment. The worst expressions he hoped to never see. “Oh, God, Charity. I am—” “I don’t wanna talk to you!” Charity interrupted. “N—Nothing happened!” He assured her. “This is ridiculous!” “Oh, sure. Nothing happened,” She responded skeptically. ‘It’s on the cover of every paper in New York.” “Because she orchestrated the photo,” Barnum replied. “I’m not in love with her!” “Of course you’re not,” Charity spoke angrily. “Not with her, not with me, not with anyone. Just you and your show.” “What are you doing?” “I’m going home.” “This is your home.” Charity reached into her pocket and handed Phineas what could only be identified as eviction papers. “The bank… they’re evicting us,” Charity told him. “Why didn’t you ask me before… I would’ve said yes. I never minded the risk, but we always did it together.” And just like that, Charity walked out the front door and slammed it loudly behind her. Soon Phineas found himself standing there, looking around the big enemy house which soon enough the bank would be coming to collect. Sighing to himself, he slumped down on the steps reflecting on the horrible mistake he made. He had it all when it was just him, Charity, and the girls. Only he gave it all up for fame and fortune. Now he was left with absolutely nothing but an empty heart and some burn marks. It turned out having it all meant ending up with nothing. <> A short while later, Phineas found himself sitting at a bar drinking away what remained of his money. He gambled everything that mattered to him most and in the end he lost it all. Now he sat as nothing more than a shell of a man, much like the circus peanuts he used to pick up after every show. He knew he deserved it considering how stupid he’d been as of late. Now it was far too late to go back to how things used to be. The sound of the door opening drew his attention to Charles and Erik walking in. Erik walked over and took a seat next to him. Charles climbed onto the counter and walked down in front of him. “Figured you’d end up here,” Charles smirked. “Feeling sorry for yourself.” Barnum merely sighed as he threw back another drink before facing Erik. “How are Philip and Rara?” He asked. “They’ll live…” Erik responded. “They’re currently unconscious and the doctors are uncertain if they’ll wake up.” “I should’ve listened to you and Philip when I had the chance,” He sighed. “You warned me this would happen, and I gambled it all away anyway. Now look at me, I have nothing.” The door opened again, as the rest of the circus troupe entered the establishment. Barnum shook his head as he continued to drink in despair. “Folks, if you’ve come to get paid, the money is gone,” He said. “All of it. Nothing left to give you—” “Shut up, Barnum!” Lettie scolded. “You just don’t get it. Our own mothers were ashamed of us. His us our whole lives. Then you pull us out of the shadows. And now you’re giving up on us, too. Maybe you are a fraud. Maybe it was just about making a buck. But you gave us a real family.” “And the circus… that was our home,” W.D. continued. “We want our home back.” Barnum was beyond shocked that even after ‘everything’ he had done, these people were still willing to stand by him. It made him really think just how badly he screwed up, and how badly he wanted to make amends. So with that in his head, he made a promise not only to them but to himself as well. That he would never again allow himself to fall so far as he had before. And he did it the only way he knew how… in song. Realizing he still had so much to make up for, Barnum quickly ran out the door as fast as he could. He ran toward the direction of the one thing he loved the most, but never realized just how much until it was gone. He kept running forward while the rest of the oddities hung at the bar, singing and dancing together as one happy family. <> Meanwhile… In the hospital, Anne held Philip’s hand tightly and the Mane Six and Spike did the same with Rara. As they all sat together, hoping for a miracle, Spike and Rainbow Dash turned toward a corner and saw Applejack just sitting in one of the empty beds looking sadly toward the floor. Leaving the others to watch for Rara, they slowly made their way toward Applejack and took a seat beside her and for a moment they sat there quietly. “A.J… would you mind if I ask… a stupid question?” Spike asked nervously. “I guess…” Applejack sighed. “Did you… like Rara? I mean… did you like her more than a friend?” “I won’t get too upset if that was the case,” Rainbow assured. “I mean, it would sting not being the first. But I won’t hold it against you.” For a moment, Applejack said not another word, she just released a heavy sigh. Then eventually, she turned her gaze toward Spike and then Rainbow Dash. “Rara was not that kind of mare,” Applejack answered honestly. “But she was the only one who knew what kind of a pony I was when we were kids. I was still trying to figure myself out, but she still treated me just the same. I enjoyed spending time with her, playing my guitar while she’d sing. Hmm… she was even responsible for the ‘Apple Chord’ gimmick.” “You mean… that was real?” Rainbow asked. “Yeah… Apple Chord, the ever talented, very famous country star who is not afraid to be herself. A pony who could do just about anything, ‘be’ any pony she wants. That made me feel… free. Rara always talked about taking our acts to Manehattan, where all ponies go to be ‘really’ famous.” “And here I thought you went to the big city to live with your aunt and uncle,” Spike inquired. “The truth is that was only partially the reason. I went to Manehattan to find Rara, to keep our promise of running our act together. But I never did find her those years back, and up until she came to Ponyville that day… I thought I’d never will. She says she learned to be true to herself because of me… but she helped me be true to my own self. To give me the courage… to fall in love with you Rainbow.” Rainbow smiled as she slowly wrapped a hoof around Applejack, holding her marefriend close as Spike leaned beside the girls. Just then, they heard a moan, and some stirring drew the trio to look. Finally, after so long, Philip and Rara started to move and awaken much to the immense joy and relief of their loved ones. Philip looked upon Anne’s face and smiled at her as she shed a tear for him. “You came…” He smiled. Anne didn’t respond with words, she merely knelt down and kissed him like she wanted to do for the longest time. While they did this, Rara slowly pushed herself out of bed with the Equestrians carefully helping her along. Rara made one look and saw Applejack eyeing her with the same shimmering eyes as her. For a moment they uttered not a word, just stared. Until suddenly, Applejack raced forward, and her friends watched as she and Rara hugged tightly. “Oh thank Celestia yer alright!” Applejack cried. “Ah thought ah done lost ya forever. Ah’d never live with mahself if the last thing we did was fight.” “It’s okay A.J…” Rara assured her. “Truth be told, you had ‘every’ right to call me out like you did. I was losing myself again, just as you said would happen. I was so caught up with the world seeing me as worthless I forgot that all that mattered was what ‘my’ friends think of me.” “What about your music career?” Twilight asked. “None of it matters, not without my friends by my side every step of the way.” The ponies and Spike hugged one another in joy over the fact they were all friends again and all was right with the world. All of a sudden, Pinkie Pie’s ears perked up as she thought she could hear a melody somewhere in the distance. “Does any pony besides me hear singing?” Pinkie asked. “Shh… we’re having a moment Pinkie,” Fluttershy hushed gently.
The Greatest ShowAt the Hallet mansion, Caroline and Helen stood at the window looking out toward New York City in the distance. They missed their father terribly, wishing more than anything that they could be a family again… just like they used to. They cared not for riches or the fancy life, only that they were all together and having fun like in a fairy tale. As the thoughts of never having that started to course through their heads, they both suddenly snapped out of it when they noticed their father climbing up the drive towards the house. “Caroline! He’s here!” Helen shouted joyfully. They both raced from the room and down the stairs to meet their father just as there was a knock at the front door. Mr. Hallet was the first to answer and a look of disdain spread on his face the moment he saw Phineas standing on the other side. Phineas, meanwhile, had the biggest smile and a look of determination. “I would like to see my wife,” He said. “She’s not here,” Mr. Hallet responded. “She’s at the beach!” Caroline yelled from the stairs. Phineas looked up and smiled toward his beloved daughters who smiled back with enthusiasm. They both descended the stairs rapidly and embraced him in a massive hug which he gave back tenfold. “Oh how I’ve missed you my darling daughters,” He laughed. “We missed you too daddy,” Helen replied. “Promise that you’ll never leave us again,” Caroline added. Phineas pulled back as he looked into his daughter’s eyes. “I swear on it,” He smiled. “No, you have to ‘Pinkie Promise’!” Helen giggled. “Pinkie Promise?” Barnum asked confused. “It’s something Aunt Pinkie Pie taught us,” Caroline nodded. “You have to say, ‘Cross my heart, hope to fly, stick a cupcake in my eye’.” Barnum chuckled in amusement, as he watched his daughters demonstrate the secret promise they learned from their new friend. Still he decided he would do whatever it took to make things up with his family. He proceeded to then do the following steps of the Pinkie Promise. “Cross my heart, hope to fly, stick a cupcake in my eye,” He smirked. Caroline and Helen both squealed with glee as they hugged their father once more. “Okay girls, I’ll be back in a moment,” Barnum said. “I have to go see your mother really quick.” Barnum pulled away from the girls and started his way out the door toward the beach. Before he could get too far, he was grabbed by Mr. Hallet, who looked him dead in the eye. Phineas waited for the inevitable lecture he no doubt deserved, but it never came. All that happened as Mr. Hallet giving him a nod and one simple request. “Take care of my daughter,” He said. He held out his hand which really surprised Phineas. Nonetheless, he took it willingly and shook it with a smile. “I promise you that I would,” He replied. Barnum soon turned heel and ran straight out of the house down the beach. When he got there, he saw Charity standing there on the very spot they had as kids and just stared toward the sunset. Phineas walked down and stood right beside her, causing her to dart her eyes in his direction and then back toward the sunset. Phineas wasn’t about to go on a ‘huge’ tangent like he normally would in the past. Instead, he opted to speak directly from the heart. “I brought hardship on you and our family,” He spoke honestly. “You warned me… and I wouldn’t listen. I just… I wanted to be more than I was.” Charity turned her head and looked directly at him right in the eyes. “I never wanted anything but the man I fell in love with,” She said. Phineas nodded his head in understanding and proceeded to sing out once more with shaky breaths. Barnum (Sings): Let this promise in me start Like an anthem in my heart However big However small From now on “From now on…” He spoke finally. Smiling at the knowledge that the man she once loved was back, Charity threw her arms around her husband and he in turn did the same. They just stood there hugging for a while before they finally drew back and shared a loving kiss. As the sun set over the horizon, things seemed to be changing for Phineas Taylor Barnum and his family at last. <> The next day, the entire circus troupe stood amongst the ashes of the building that had one been their home and sorted through the charred rubble. The Mare Six, Spike, Erik, and Rara were all there as well with Applejack helping Rara around in case she needed help. Despite Rara’s constant comments that she was already to walk on her own, Applejack being ever so stubborn wouldn’t hear of it. Especially after being separated for the past two months. “I can’t believe everything’s gone,” Spike commented. “All in a blaze that would make even Ember jealous.” “Let’s not think on the negatives at the moment,” Fluttershy advised. “Maybe Mr. Barnum will get a lone and be able to rebuild.” “I doubt that…” Rainbow replied. “After already being scammed, the bank won’t lend him any more money.” “You never know darling,” Rarity spoke up. “We just have to keep positive every pony,” Twilight spoke optimistically. “Things are starting to fall into place. I can feel it.” “That’s the Pinkie Pie spirit!” Pinkie smiled, giving Twilight the one-armed hug. “Besides, after everything that’s happened already…” “Don’t… you… dare… finish!” Rainbow hissed in Pinkie’s face. The pink party pony nodded emphatically and actually turned her mouth into a zipper and zipped it shut. Rainbow floated on back to the ground next to her marefriend just as Barnum walked up to the rest of the group. Philip and Erik walked up for a word with their partner. “Bank said no?” “Emphatically,” Barnum nodded. “Repeatedly. I don’t think there’s a banker left in the country I can fool into loaning me more money, so… I’m really sorry to disappoint you all.” “Don’t worry, Barnum,” Charles assured. “We’ve gotten used to it by now.” Everyone laughed at that before a smirk made its way to Philip’s face. “You know, Barnum… when I first met you… I had an inheritance, acclaim, an invitation to every party in town,” He spoke. “And now, thanks to you, all that’s gone. “Wow… great pep talk Phil,” Rainbow said sarcastically. “I wasn’t finished,” Philip responded. “All that’s left is friendship, love, and work that I adore. You brought joy into my life.” “Into all our lives,” Lettie nodded. “Hear, hear!” Everyone agreed. Hearing him say this brought a smile to Barnum’s face once more. “If only the bank would take joy as collateral,” He chuckled. “They may not… but I will,” Erik replied. “As will I,” Philip agreed. “I own 10% of the show. Knowing who I was working for… I had the good sense to take my cut weekly.” “And owning the other 45% of this show, I also purchased your shares when you forfeited them,” Erik added. “I was able to invest that money into a good deal of thriving businesses and increased our profits significantly.” “Hot dang Erik, you really are a sly devil!” Spike chuckled. “Indeed my young friend,” Erik replied, patting his scales. “Philip, Erik, I can’t let you gamble it on me,” Barnum shook his head. “Sure you can!” Philip smiled. “And you will,” Erik continued. “Don’t turn sensible on us now,” Lettie spoke up. Both Erik and Philip held out their hands to Barnum, hoping he’d accept their deal. Not even needing to think twice, Barnum shook both their hands and nodded. “Partners!” Philip smiled. “Split three ways even!” Erik nodded. “Partners,” Barnum agreed. Everyone cheered and laughed as the three partners made it official before Philip broke a little bit of news to them. “The only thing is… I don’t know how we’re gonna afford a building.” Once again, the ever-thinking Phineas Barnum had another ingenious idea. “We don’t need a building,” He stated. “Real estate in Manhattan is a terrible investment. Why, I can get land down by the docks for almost nothing! All we need… is a tent.” “Ooh, good thing I always keep one with me in case of emergencies!” Pinkie smiled. Reaching into her mane, Pinkie Pie pulled an assortment of items before pulling out the equipment needed for a giant circus tent. Everyone faced her with confusion, then over to the Mane Six. “It’s Pinkie Pie,” Twilight informed. “Best not to ask questions.” <> It was only a few days later that the circus business was booming again, as the Barnum and Bailey Circus tent was set up along the wharf. Patrons of all ages came to see the show as lights shined brightly in the tent and the atmosphere was rife with excitement. The fans excitedly stomped on the bleachers as a few shadowy figures walked beneath in the form of two men, several ponies, and a teenage dragon. In typical circus fashion, they introduced the show with a spectacle of a song. (Imagine the first part of this song from the first chapter) ]The Greatest Showman | "The Greatest Show" Lyric Video | Fox Family Entertainment - YouTube The troupe ran forward as they followed behind Barnum and his partners. Fluttershy led the animals behind them all including two elephants, two lions that leapt through flaming rings, and all assortment of amazing creatures. Barnum raced off stage where Philip waited on the sidelines watching them work. The Mane Six and Spike noticed this and ran off behind him, wondering what he was up to now. Barnum proceeded to take his own hat from his head and handed it to Philip. “This is yours now,” He smiled. Philip was a slight confused by all this but was also shocked beyond belief. From day one, Barnum was always the one the people came to see and now he was essentially passing the torch onto Philip. With a smile, the young Carlyle graciously accepted the hat and placed it on his head. “What will you do now?” Philip asked. “I’m gonna watch my girls grow up,” Phineas replied. Barnum then looked down at the Mane Six and Spike, kneeling to their height so he may thank them properly. “Thank you all so much,” He said appreciatively. “You all came to me and my family when we needed help the most. You took us to heights well beyond what we ever dreamed possible, and for that I will always be forever grateful.” “You are absolutely welcome Mr. Barnum,” Twilight smiled. “It’s been one heck of an adventure,” Spike added. “We’ll never forget this.” “And thank you Mr. Barnum, for helping me realize I don’t need to be a famous singer to feel loved,” Rara thanked him. “All I need are my friends and family. As long as I have that, I’m golden.” “Your welcome,” Phineas nodded. “Do say goodbye to Charity and the girls for us,” Rarity told him. “I most definitely will.” Barnum soon gave them all individual hugs before getting back up and raced through the back of the tent. Philip then looked toward the ponies and Spike with a smile. “Well guys, we have a show to finish,” He declared. “You know what I think will really make this show a spectacle?” Rainbow asked. She floated up and whispered into Philip’s ear. He then looked at her with confusion. “Can you really pull that off?” “Kid, I invented the move,” She said cockily. “Of course I can.” “Then I say… go for it!” Philip agreed. Then Philip and the ponies raced back onstage to finish what was surely the ‘Greatest Show on Earth’. Rainbow looked up toward the top of the tent where a single flap opened up. She took off into the air and soared straight through it. She flew as high as she possibly could, looked back down over the tent, and over all of New York. Giving a smile, she flew back down to Earth as fast as she possibly could. Eventually, she flew at such a super-sonic speed that it was actually getting difficult to stop her face from peeling back from the sheer force. The moment the song was over, Rainbow flew back in and hit one of the biggest Sonic Rainbooms she ever made. The force caused the audience to hold onto their seats as the rainbow flowed throughout the tent. When it was finished, everyone stood on their feet and applauded so loudly that it didn’t even seem possible. Everyone in the ensemble took a bow for the crowd before a strong wind picked up and everyone looked over to see the mirror portal opening up. Everyone stared in amazement as the Mane Six, Spike, Erik, and Rara all stepped forward. “Guess it’s time to head home,” Twilight pointed out. “Looks like it,” Spike nodded. They all turned back around to face the troupe of people they had really come to know and love throughout this entire journey. Philip and Anne both stepped forward to say their goodbyes personally. “Thank you guys,” Philip thanked first. “Not just for the show but for everything. I really don’t think we ever would’ve been able to accomplish all of this without your help.” “You guys helped us all find the family we’ve been looking for our entire lives,” Anne smiled tearfully. “Well, we certainly wouldn’t have been able to learn some really important things without you guys either,” Rara smiled back. “Now we can go back to our friends and families with some new knowledge and ideas for the future,” Fluttershy nodded. “Not to mention adding a new member to our lovely little community,” Erik smiled, placing a hand on Rarity’s stomach. “We’ll all miss you!” Lettie called from the troupe. The Mane Six and Spike all looked back at the ensemble with a few tears in their eyes before they went back and embraced every one of them in a hug. After that, they all turned back to the portal that would take them back home and slowly walked forward. With one last look over their shoulder, toward the smiling troupe waving at them, they waved back before stepping through the portal and thus bringing this spectacular journey to an end. The End
A Bad DayAn array of grey clouds lined the sky on a dreary afternoon in New York City. Phineas Taylor Barnum typed away on a typewriter for his job, as an editorial for an accounting firm. Day after day was the same routine for Mr. Barnum, typing away for what little money he could make for his family. As he typed away, he thought back to the events of the day before and he still couldn’t believe all of it had happened. Unable to believe that a group of colorful talking ponies, a teenage dragon, and a former opera ghost were now staying with him and his family. Granted they were a very nice bunch, more than willing to help them out, it just seemed unbelievable. It made him wonder what else could be possible in the world. He was then suddenly shaken from his thoughts when his boss, Mr. Smith, started walking through the office. “Mr. Smith?” Chalmers called out. “Yes?” Smith responded. “Have a look at this,” Chalmers spoke, handing out a document. “Yes, yes I see it… thank you Chalmers, that will do.” Phineas quickly jumped from his desk and raced behind Smith with a look of determination on his face. “Sir, Phineas Taylor Barnum,” He introduced himself. “Uh, if I may sir, I believe I have skills and ideas that go well beyond punching numbers into an adding machine. I read about this German fellow, Lilienthal, I believe, who’s developed a glider that can take a man in the air, sir. Isn’t that amazing? I mean, if you were to apply that to this business, it would be revolutionary.” Smith seemingly ignored him as he made his way to the front of the office and turned back to address all of the employees. “Gentlemen!” He spoke loudly. “Can I have your attention?” Everyone looked up from their desks toward their boss, who seemed rather disheartened. “You’re all dismissed.” Everyone soon broke into light chatter, not knowing exactly what their boss was talking about. Barnum grabbed the piece of paper Smith was carrying and his eyes widened upon noticing what exactly was written on it. “Bankrupt?” He asked, in shock. “I thought the company had a dozen trading ships.” “Yes, at the bottom of the South China Sea,” Smith responded. “Typhoon sank ‘em all.” And just like that, Mr. Smith walked off leaving a now unemployed Phineas Barnum shocked beyond words. Here he was a man already struggling to make ends meet as it were when he was employed. Except now he no longer had a job. How was he possibly going to provide for his family now? <> Later that evening, as Phineas was returning home, all he could think about was how to break this news to his family. Having no job meant that likely he and his family will be evicted from their apartment, cast out onto the streets. Especially now that he was unable to find some form of income to support the family. Pushing the apartment door open, Phineas huffed upon noticing the still-leaking roof. He shook his head in shame knowing everything that was happening to him, and his family, had come so fast. One of the talking ponies, Rara he believed was her name, approached Barnum to greet him. “Welcome back, Mr. Barnum,” She greeted sweetly. “I hope your day went wonderfully.” “Yes… wonderful,” He grumbled sarcastically. “Are you alright sir?” Rara asked worriedly. “I’ll be fine,” Barnum brushed off. “Where are all the others?” “I believe they’re playing up on the roof.” Phineas released a chuckle and shook his head. Of course they’d do something like that. Just as he was about to head off to climb the fire escape to the roof, he instantly stopped in his tracks when he heard a voice softly singing. He slowly turned back toward Rara, who sung quietly to herself. But even then, he could tell she had a voice that sounded like a thousand angels harmonizing together. He slowly walked back toward her, kneeling to her height as he looked at her in utter amazement. “You have such an astonishing voice,” He admired. Rara blushed at his compliment but turned away with a shake of her head. “Not all ponies seem to agree,” She sighed sadly. “What do you mean?” “In the land where I come from, I always wanted to be a singer,” Rara explained. “Since I was small, that’s all I ever wanted to do with my life. Eventually I did achieve that dream, but lately ponies believe I’m washed up and no good anymore. I don’t know, maybe they’re right…” “That sounds like a load of nonsense if you ask me,” Barnum said. “You have a voice that could make birds swoop to the ground from jealousy. Perhaps we can come up with a plan to help others see what I see in you.” Rara looked upon Phineas as a smile crept its way onto her face. Perhaps he and all of her other friends were right. Here she was feeling sorry for herself and actually believing the nonsense of critics whose words really meant nothing to her. She, and she alone, could decide when her career was over. And by Celestia, she was going to shine even brighter than she ever did before. “Thank you Mr. Barnum,” She smiled. “It’s really nice to hear you say that.” “You are most welcome,” Phineas responded. “Now come along, let’s go find the others.” Barnum then climbed out the window and started up the fire escape to the roof with Rara following closely behind. When they both reached the roof, they smiled when they saw Charity and his two girls playing with the others. Apparently they were playing some game about the old west with Charity and the girls pretending to be cowboys (Or ‘cowgirls’ in this case) while Applejack showed them how real cowpokes do it. “Hands in the air partners!” Applejack said playfully. “Yer fixin’ tah get lassoed by Sheriff Applejack!” The country pony pulled out her lasso and twirled it around as the girls raced around screaming with glee while Applejack hurled the lasso around trying to catch them. That is until Rainbow Dash zipped in and landed directly between Applejack and the two girls. “You want them?” She asked. “You’ll have to get through me, cowgirl!” “With pleasure!” Applejack grinned. From the sidelines, everyone else laughed and had a good time watching the girls and their old friends playing together. Rarity snuggled up closely toward Erik, watching and envisioning that very same future their own little one shall have someday soon. Charity looked over and noticed her husband and Rara stepping onto the roof. “You’re home early,” She smiled toward her husband. “And until further notice,” Phineas responded, handing the paper. Charity looked at the parchment, as a sad look formed across her face. However, she merely brushed it off and a smile returned as it had before. “Well, I didn’t think you were long for that job,” She said. “Or ‘any’ job, apparently,” Phineas sighed. “That’s what makes our life together so exciting.” Despite his wife’s cheerful outlook on everything, Phineas could not help but feel disappointed in himself. Back when they were children, he promised her the world. Now here he was unemployed and nowhere close to giving her ‘everything’ she deserved. “Charity,” He spoke ashamed. “This isn’t the life I promised you.” “But I have everything I want,” Charity responded. “What about the magic?” “What do you call those two girls?” Barnum looked over at the two little girls, who were still playing around with their new pony and dragon friends. Then Pinkie Pie popped out from nowhere, right between Phineas and Charity, making the pair jump in surprise. “Yeah! Or a group of walking-talking ponies and a dragon,” She giggled. “I mean it’s not something you see every day. Seems pretty magical.” “I suppose it does,” Phineas chuckled. “Hey, you partners, look who moseyed into the corral!” Charity called toward the girls. “Daddy!” They both exclaimed excitedly. They both ran up to their father, leaping into his embrace as they all laughed. The Equestrian group also walked alongside the family with smiles on their faces as well. “Welcome home, Mr. Barnum,” Twilight greeted kindly. “I do so hope your day went swimmingly darling,” Rarity said. “Eh, it was alright I suppose,” Barnum responded, with a shrug. Applejack instantly knew he was lying but decided not to call him out on it. For one thing, it was his business after all. She had no right to interfere with his favors. And at the same time, she could tell by the look upon his face that he was so disheartened. “Did you bring a present?” Caroline asked. “A present for what?” Barnum asked, faking confusion. “For my birthday!” *GASP!!!* A huge gasp came from Pinkie Pie herself, whose pupils shrank to the size of pinpricks and her mouth hung open. “Your what?!” She asked. “My birthday,” Caroline repeated. Almost instantaneously, a massive smile took over Pinkie’s whole face. She burst into the air with a rainbow trailing behind her. She exploded into a huge cloud of confetti before falling back to the ground wearing a party hat. “HAPPY BIRTHDAY!” She yelled loudly. She grabbed a few other party hats from her mane and stuck them in everyone else’s heads. “ooh… this is so super-duper, extra-super, ultra-amazing!” She spoke excitedly. “We absolutely have to celebrate the only way I know how… Pinkie Pie style! That means balloons everywhere, streams all around, games, cake, ice cream, pinatas…” As she listed off all the party items, Barnum and his entire family looked over toward the ponies and Spike for an explanation. All they could offer in return was a shrug of their shoulders. “Don’t ask… just don’t,” Spike sighed. Though they were still quite confused, they all shared a laugh all the same. “It’s not your birthday,” Phineas joked, earning his daughter’s playful glare. “Okay, I do have a present… but not just any present. Oh, no. The most amazing birthday present ever.” “Ooh… do tell darling,” Rarity spoke intrigued. “Is it something super awesome, like me?” Rainbow asked. “Well, I certainly hope so.” Phineas reached behind him and grabbed his briefcase which he then clicked open. Pulling it open, he pulled out what resembled a candle on a copper pedestal and some kind of copper cylinder with holes in it. “This extraordinary machine was originally created by Leonardo da Vinci, 400 years ago,” He explained. “Ah yes, the great Da Vinci,” Erik reminisced. “You know, I incorporated many of his designs when building most of my opera house.” “But the blueprints had been lost for centuries until just last week, on a stormy night,” Barnum continued. “When a sunken pirate ship washed up on the shores of Nantucket.” “They found skeletons and treasures, and the blueprints were recovered by none other than J.W. Mercantile. The blueprints crossed my desk very briefly, but I managed to commit them to memory. And if I have remembered correctly…” He assembled the machine to completion and when it was ready, he placed the cylinder over the candle. When he was finished, he gave the cylinder a spin and the light emanating from the little holes made it appear that thousands of little stars spun all around them. “Happy birthday, Caroline,” He said. “This is a wishing machine. You tell it your wishes and it keeps them safe until they come true. Even if you forget them, they’re always there.” “Can I tell a wish?” Helen asked. “Step right up. Go ahead.” Helen quickly ran up and knelt down as she closed her eyes tightly and made a wish. “I wish to marry Santa Claus,” She giggled. “Not a bad wish,” Spike chuckled. “If someone brought me gifts all the time, I’d marry them too. Then again, maybe that’s just the greedy dragon in me talking.” “Oh Spike!” Twilight giggled, rolling her eyes. “That is a good wish,” Barnum chuckled. Then Caroline came up and closed her eyes as well. “I wish… for ballet slippers.” “Oh my, that’s a very lovely wish Caroline,” Fluttershy smiled. “What’s your wish, Mommy?” Caroline asked her mother. Charity walked over and looked toward the little spinning device. She smiled toward her husband and two little girls. “I wish for happiness like this forever, for you and you… and for your father.” “Boring!” Barnum and Rainbow Dash chuckled. “Boring?” Charity laughed. “Since when was happiness ever been boring?” “Nothing wrong with wanting to be happy,” Rainbow assured. “I just figured you’d wish for something like a new place or something. No offense, but this apartment right now is… crummy.” “Don’t y’all be so rude hun!” Applejack lightly scolded. While they spoked, Caroline and Helen looked on in admiration as they watched the lights dance across the sheets on the rooftop. As they both watched, they imagined so many wondrous things in their heads. Having these thoughts in their heads made the two girls want to sing. Phineas watched as his girls both sang; he couldn’t help but admire just how much they reminded him of himself and his wife when they were their age. It was then that an imaginary lightbulb went off in his head as he finished. Standing quickly, he walked toward Erik and Rarity. He looked down toward the former opera ghost who looked at him in confusion. “Can I help you?” Erik asked curiously. “I certainly hope so my friend,” Phineas responded with a smile. Though Erik had no idea what Barnum was thinking in his head, he had the sensation that whatever it was involved something exotic. If there was anyone who knew about any and all things exotic, it was the Phantom. Erik looked down at his wife and gave a quick kiss to her forehead. “If you’ll excuse me a moment mon cheri,” He said kindly. “Of course my love,” Rarity nodded. Erik stood to his feet and followed Barnum off to the side, out of earshot of the others. “What can I assist you with my friend?” Erik asked. Phineas sighed for a moment before deciding to tell him the truth. “To be completely honest with you my friend, I lost my job today,” Barnum confessed. “I’m sorry to hear that good sir,” Erik apologized. “Worry not my friend, I have an idea,” Barnum said. “And I need your help to see it through.” “Why ‘my’ help?” “Because from all the tales you told the other night, clearly you are a man who knows the exotic and the odd.” Erik squinted his eyes as he tried to think about where Barnum was going with this. “Continue…” He nodded. “I want to show people a world far beyond anything they have ever seen or heard of in their entire life,” Barnum said excitedly. “If I can show them all the world far beyond their imagination, surely they will pay to see it.” “That’s quite the gamble my friend,” Erik spoke unconvinced. “Speaking from a man who knows what it’s truly like trying to show the world the beauty underneath, the masses tend not to admire what they do not understand.” “That is exactly why you’re just the man to help me!” Barnum exclaimed. “You have seen that world and you want to showcase it just as I do. Separately, we are sure to fail. But together, we have a chance to make history. If nothing else, we do it not for the glory, but for the ones we love most.” Erik sighed as he looked at Barnum and then back at his loving wife and his friends. “What exactly is your plan?” he relented. “Tomorrow, you and I shall go to the bank and apply for a loan,” He informed. “And what will you give with that money?” Barnum looked toward his friend with a bright smile upon his face. “A brighter future…”
